DIGITAL CAMERA Reference Manual This camera features updated firmware with added functions. For more information, see “Added Functions” (page 1142). • Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera. • To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read “For Your Safety” (page xli). • After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible place for future reference.
Package Contents Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera. ❏ Camera ❏ BF-1B body cap ❏ EN-EL18c rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover ❏ MH-26a battery charger with power cable and two contact protectors (shape of power cable depends on country or region of sale) ❏ HDMI/USB cable clip (0 1068) ❏ BS-3 accessory shoe cover (0 1066) ❏ ❏ ❏ ❏ Memory cards are sold separately.
D The Nikon Download Center Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware updates, NX Studio and other Nikon software, and manuals for Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.
About This Manual ❚❚ Symbols The following symbols and conventions are employed in this manual. Use them to help locate the information you need. D This icon marks notes, information that should be read before using this product. A This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful when using this product. 0 This icon marks references to other sections in this manual. ❚❚ Conventions • This camera uses CFexpress (Type B) and XQD memory cards.
A For Your Safety “For Your Safety” contains important safety instructions. Be sure to read them before using the camera. For more information, see “For Your Safety” (0 xli).
Table of Contents Package Contents ................................................................................... ii About This Manual................................................................................. iv Menu List.............................................................................................. xxxv For Your Safety....................................................................................... xli Notices ................................................................
First Steps 27 Readying the Camera.......................................................................... Attaching the Strap....................................................... Charging the Battery .................................................... Inserting the Battery ..................................................... Attaching a Lens............................................................. Inserting Memory Cards.............................................. Camera Setup.................
Uploading Pictures ............................................................................... 77 Uploading Pictures to Smart Devices ..................... 77 Uploading Pictures to a Computer or FTP Server..................................................................... 77 Camera Controls 80 The G Button ..................................................................................... 80 Using the Menus.............................................................
The Release Mode Dial and S Button........................................ 109 Choosing a Release Mode......................................... 109 The Y Button....................................................................................... 111 Choosing a Metering Option................................... 111 The BKT Button.................................................................................... 113 The S (Q) Button...........................................................................
Shooting Settings Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)............................................................................................ Adjusting Image Area Settings............................... Adjusting Image Quality........................................... Choosing an Image Size............................................ Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus) ............................ Choosing a Focus Mode............................................ Autofocus Mode .
Choosing the Operation Performed When the Shutter Is Released (Release Mode)......................................... 203 Choosing a Release Mode Such as Single-Frame, Continuous, or Quiet Shutter-Release............................................ 203 Using the Self-Timer (E)............................................ 209 Mirror Up Mode (Mup) ............................................... 211 Adjusting the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light (ISO Sensitivity) ...................................................
Image Processing (Picture Controls) ........................................... Picture Controls ........................................................... Modifying Picture Controls from the Menus..... Custom Picture Controls........................................... Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows (Active D-Lighting and HDR) ..................................................... Active D-Lighting ........................................................ High Dynamic Range (HDR)................
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings......................... 312 Photo Shooting Menu................................................ 313 Movie Shooting Menu ............................................... 315 Other Settings ............................................................... 316 Combining Multiple Exposures in a Single Photo (Multiple Exposure) ....................................................................... 318 Multiple Exposure Options.......................................
The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography) ....... Customizing the i Menus: Customize i Menu ..................... Using Non-CPU Lenses (Non-CPU Lens Data).......................... Entering Lens Data...................................................... Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data................................. Location Data ...................................................................................... Location Data Options...............................................
Protecting Pictures from Deletion................................................ 421 Rating Pictures..................................................................................... 423 Selecting Pictures for Upload......................................................... 425 Filtered Playback................................................................................. 427 [Filtered Playback Criteria]........................................ 427 Deleting Pictures.....................................
Built-in Wireless Camera and Network System Chart ............................................ Connecting to Smart Devices ........................................................ The SnapBridge App .................................................. What SnapBridge Can Do for You ......................... Wireless Connections................................................. Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode) ....................... Connecting via Bluetooth ........................................
Ethernet/WT-6 514 Ethernet Connections and the WT-6 ........................................... 514 The Wireless Transmitter Utility.............................. 515 What Ethernet and the WT-6 Can Do for You........................... 516 Upload to FTP Servers or Computers ................... 516 Computer-Based Remote Photography (Camera Control Mode) ........................................ 517 Browser-Based Remote Photography (HTTP Server Mode)................................................
Creating Network Profiles (WT-6)................................................. WT-6 Wireless Connection Options...................... Image Transfer and Camera Control Modes...... HTTP Server Mode....................................................... FTP Upload Mode........................................................ Upload to Computers and FTP Servers ...................................... Connecting to a Computer or FTP Server........... Camera Control..............................................
On-Camera Flash Photography 640 “On-Camera” Versus “Remote” ...................................................... 640 Camera-Mounted Flash Units.................................. 640 Remote Flash Photography ..................................... 640 Using an On-Camera Flash.............................................................. 641 Flash Control Mode............................................................................ 645 Flash Modes..........................................................
Optical/Radio AWL............................................................................. 694 Flash Info for Remote Units ............................................................ 695 Flash Control Mode Displays................................... 695 Menu Guide 698 Defaults.................................................................................................. 698 Playback Menu Defaults ........................................... 698 Photo Shooting Menu Defaults.........................
Copy Image(s)................................................................................738 Copying Pictures .......................................................... 739 Hide Image .....................................................................................746 Slide Show ......................................................................................748 Viewing Slide Shows................................................... 748 C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ...............
ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................. 764 White Balance ............................................................................... 764 Set Picture Control ...................................................................... 764 Manage Picture Control ............................................................ 765 Color Space.................................................................................... 765 Active D-Lighting.......................
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options ..... 782 Reset Movie Shooting Menu....................................................783 File Naming ....................................................................................783 Destination.....................................................................................783 Image Area .....................................................................................784 Auto DX Crop ..........................................................
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ............... 797 Custom Settings Bank................................................................ 802 Renaming Custom Settings Banks ........................ 802 Restoring Default Settings ....................................... 803 a: Autofocus.................................................................................. 804 a1: AF-C Priority Selection................................................. 804 a2: AF-S Priority Selection .................
a17: Focus Point Options...................................................815 Manual Focus Mode.................................................... 816 Focus Point Brightness .............................................. 816 Dynamic-Area AF Assist............................................. 816 a18: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode..............................817 b: Metering/Exposure................................................................ 818 b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value...........................
d5: Exposure Delay Mode ................................................. 827 d6: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter............................. 827 d7: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)................................... 828 d8: Limit Selectable Image Area ..................................... 829 d9: File Number Sequence ............................................... 830 d10: Peaking Highlights..................................................... 832 d11: Framing Grid Display ...................................
f: Controls....................................................................................... 844 f1: Customize i Menu .......................................................844 f2: Customize i Menu (Lv)...............................................846 Photo Live View Display WB .................................... 848 Split-Screen Display Zoom ....................................... 849 f3: Custom Controls .............................................................
g: Movie.......................................................................................... 877 g1: Customize i Menu ..................................................... 877 Multi-Selector Power Aperture............................... 878 Multi Selector Exposure Comp............................... 878 g2: Custom Controls ........................................................... 879 g3: Multi Selector Center Button.................................... 884 g4: Highlight Display ......................
Clean Image Sensor.....................................................................905 Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning .....................................................906 Image Dust Off Ref Photo .........................................................906 Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data ......... 907 Pixel Mapping................................................................................910 Image Comment ..........................................................................
Beep Options................................................................................. 923 Beep On/Off................................................................... 923 Volume ............................................................................ 924 Pitch ................................................................................. 924 Touch Controls ............................................................................. 924 Enable/Disable Touch Controls.........................
Wired LAN/WT...............................................................................937 Wired LAN/WT Functions.......................................... 937 Choose Hardware ........................................................ 937 Network Settings ......................................................... 938 Options ............................................................................ 945 Conformity Marking....................................................................949 Battery Info.
Distortion Control........................................................................ 976 Perspective Control .................................................................... 978 Monochrome ................................................................................ 979 Image Overlay............................................................................... 980 Add ................................................................................... 980 Lighten and Darken.....................
Technical Notes 1021 Camera Displays............................................................................... The Viewfinder........................................................... The Information Display......................................... Live View (Still Photography/Movies) ............... The Top Control Panel ............................................ The Rear Control Panel ........................................... Compatible F Mount Lenses...........................................
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ........................ 1085 Camera Care................................................................ 1085 Battery Care ................................................................. 1089 Using the Charger ..................................................... 1092 Exposure Program ........................................................................... 1093 Specifications....................................................................................
Menu List The camera offers the following menus. For a more complete description of individual menu items, refer to the “Menu Guide” chapter in the Reference Manual. Some items may not be displayed depending on camera settings or on the type of lens, flash unit, or other accessory attached.
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU Vignette control Diffraction compensation Auto distortion control Flicker reduction Flash control Auto bracketing Multiple exposure HDR (high dynamic range) Interval timer shooting Time-lapse movie Focus shift shooting Silent live view photography xxxvi Menu List MOVIE SHOOTING MENU Reset movie shooting menu File naming Destination Image area Frame size/frame rate Movie quality Movie file type ISO sensitivity settings White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Active D-Li
CUSTOM SETTING MENU Custom settings bank a Autofocus a1 AF-C priority selection a2 AF-S priority selection a3 Focus tracking with lock-on a4 Focus points used a5 Store points by orientation a6 AF activation a7 Single-point AF watch area a8 3D-tracking face-detection Group-area AF face a9 detection a10 Custom groupings (C1/C2) Auto-area AF face a11 detection a12 Auto-area AF starting point a13 Focus point persistence Limit AF-area mode a14 selection Autofocus mode a15 restrictions a16 Focus point wrap-around
CUSTOM SETTING MENU d Shooting/display Continuous shooting d1 speed d2 Max. continuous release Limit release mode d3 selection d4 Sync.
CUSTOM SETTING MENU f Controls f1 Customize i menu f2 Customize i menu (Lv) f3 Custom controls Multi selector center f4 button f5 Shutter spd & aperture lock f6 Customize command dials f7 Multi selector f8 Release button to use dial f9 Reverse indicators f10 Live view button options f11 D switch f12 Full-frame playback flicks f13 Prefer sub-selector center g Movie g1 Customize i menu g2 Custom controls Multi selector center g3 button g4 Highlight display SETUP MENU Format memory card Language Time zone and
SETUP MENU Wireless remote (WR) options Assign remote (WR) Fn button Airplane mode Connect to smart device Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi) Wired LAN/WT Conformity marking Battery info Slot empty release lock Save/load menu settings Reset all settings Firmware version xl Menu List RETOUCH MENU NEF (RAW) processing Trim Resize D-Lighting Red-eye correction Straighten Distortion control Perspective control Monochrome Image overlay Trim movie MY MENU Add items Remove items Rank items Choose tab
For Your Safety To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read them. A DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a high risk of death or severe injury. A WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in death or severe injury.
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock. Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product while it is on or plugged in. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns. Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such as propane, gasoline or aerosols. Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically designated for use with this product. When using batteries, chargers, and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do not: • Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame. • Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable the location data feature. End location tracking. Disable wireless features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited. The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities. Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will not be used for an extended period.
A DANGER (Batteries) Do not mishandle batteries. Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire: • Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product. • Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat. • Do not disassemble. • Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces, hairpins, or other metal objects.
A WARNING (Batteries) Keep batteries out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention. Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals. The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or otherwise damaged by animals. Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction.
A DANGER (CR1616 Lithium Watch Batteries) Do not mishandle batteries. Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the battery leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire: • Do not attempt to recharge the battery. • Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat. • Do not disassemble. • Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces, hairpins, or other metal objects. • Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to powerful physical shocks.
A WARNING (CR1616 Lithium Watch Batteries) Keep batteries out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention. Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object should it become wet. Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery, such as discoloration or deformation.
Notices • No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior written permission. • Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice. • Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
● Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law. • Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped “Sample.
● Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses, chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
D Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
Getting to Know the Camera Parts of the Camera Camera Body 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 1 GNSS antenna (0 384) 2 I button (0 108) 3 Release mode dial lock release (0 109, 203) 4 Eyelet for camera strap (0 27) 5 BKT button (0 113, 251, 259, 265) 6 Release mode dial (0 109, 203) 7 Y button (0 111, 178) Parts of the Camera 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 Movie-record button (0 63) Power switch (0 8) Shutter-release button (0 50) E button (0 117, 199) S (Q) button (0 114, 213, 887) Top control panel (0 9, 1033) Parts of the Camera 7 E (focal plane mark; 0 177) 8 Diopter adjustment control (0 14) 9 Accessory shoe (for optional flash unit; 0 641) 10 Accessory shoe cover (0 1066)
4 5 6 1 2 7 8 9 10 3 24 15 11 12 13 14 1 Stereo microphone (for movies; 0 63) 2 Meter coupling lever 3 Mirror (0 63, 1078) 4 Self-timer lamp (0 209) 5 Flash sync terminal cover 6 Ten-pin remote terminal cover 7 USB connector cover 8 Peripheral connector cover 9 HDMI connector cover 10 Cover for microphone, headphone, and Ethernet connectors 11 Lens release button (0 37) 12 Battery-chamber cover latch (0 32) 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 13 Battery-chamber cover (0 32) 14 AF-mode button (0 98, 152, 163)
1 9 2 10 3 11 4 5 6 12 7 13 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Pv button (0 62, 134, 187) Sub-command dial (0 867) Fn1 button (0 135) Fn2 button (0 135) Sub-command dial for vertical shooting (0 867) Shutter-release button for vertical shooting Fn button (vertical; 0 135) Parts of the Camera 8 9 10 11 12 13 Security slot (for anti-theft cable; 0 7) Lens mounting mark (0 35) Lens mount (0 35) CPU contacts Tripod socket Vertical shooting shutterrelease button lock (0 54)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 16 17 18 19 11 12 13 14 15 O (Q) button (0 76, 429, 887) K button (0 71, 390) Monitor (0 18, 55, 63, 395) G button (0 80, 698) g (h/Q) button (0 87, 125, 273, 421) 6 X button (0 61, 418) 7 W (M) button (0 61, 131, 651, 653) 8 J (OK) button (0 81) 9 Network indicator (0 593) 10 Fn3 (C) button (0 135, 436) 1 2 3 4 5 11 Rear control panel (0 11, 1036) 12 S button (0 109, 208, 312) 13 T button (0 118, 144, 147) U button (0 121, 221, 312) R button (0 94) Viewfinder (0 14) Focus selecto
1 7 8 2 9 3 10 11 4 12 13 14 15 5 Viewfinder eyepiece (0 1067) Eyepiece adapter (0 1067) Eyepiece shutter lever (0 13) Eyepiece adapter latch (0 1067) 5 a button (0 55, 63, 874) 6 Live view selector (0 55, 63) 7 Sub-selector (0 166, 170, 196) 8 AF-ON button (0 107, 173) 9 Main command dial (0 867) 10 Multi selector (0 81, 393) 11 Memory card slot cover (0 38) 1 2 3 4 6 Parts of the Camera 6 16 12 Card slot cover release button cover (0 38) 13 14 15 16 Card slot cover release button (under co
D The GNSS Antenna If possible, stay in the open when using location data services. Keep the antenna pointed to the sky for best reception. D The Connector Covers Be sure to close the covers when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the connectors could cause malfunction. D The Speaker Close proximity to the speaker could corrupt data stored on magnetic stripe cards or other such magnetic storage devices. Keep magnetic storage devices away from the speaker.
The Power Switch Rotate the power switch to the “ON” position as shown to turn the camera on. Returning the switch to the “OFF” position turns the camera off. D The LCD Illuminator Rotating the power switch to D activates the backlights for the buttons and control panels (LCD illuminator). The backlights will remain lit for a few seconds after the power switch is released. The backlights turn off when the switch is rotated to D a second time or the shutter is released.
The Top Control Panel The following indicators appear in the top control panel at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see “Camera Displays” (0 1033) in “Technical Notes”.
D Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted, the memory card icon, the number of photos in the current folder (q), and the number of exposures remaining (w) will be displayed in the top control panel. Depending on the memory card, the camera may in rare cases not display this information when a card is inserted. This can be addressed by turning the camera on.
The Rear Control Panel The following indicators appear in the rear control panel at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see “Camera Displays” (0 1036) in “Technical Notes”.
The Viewfinder The following indicators appear in the viewfinder at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see “Camera Displays” (0 1021) in “Technical Notes”.
D The Viewfinder When the battery is exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder will dim. The display will return to normal when a charged battery is inserted. D Temperature Extremes The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature, and response times may drop when the temperature is low; the displays will return to normal at room temperature.
A The Diopter Adjustment Control The viewfinder can be focused by lifting and rotating the diopter adjustment control. With your eye to the viewfinder, rotate the diopter control until display in the viewfinder is in sharp focus. • Corrective lenses (available separately) can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter. • After adjusting diopter, push the diopter adjustment control back into its original position.
The Live View Displays (Photos/Movies) Press the a button to display the view through the lens in the monitor. Rotate the live view selector to C to take photographs or to 1 to record movies. ❚❚ Live View Photography The following indicators appear in the monitor at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see “Camera Displays” (0 1029) in “Technical Notes”.
2 1 10 9 1 2 3 4 16 8 Touch shooting (0 18) i icon (0 88) “k” (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 48) Number of exposures remaining (0 48, 1120) Parts of the Camera 7 6 5 4 3 5 ISO sensitivity (0 114, 213) 6 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 114, 213) 7 Aperture (0 186, 188) 8 Shutter speed (0 185, 188) 9 Metering (0 111, 178) 10 Battery indicator (0 47)
❚❚ Movies 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 1 Recording indicator (0 63) “No movie” indicator (0 297) 2 Frame size and rate/image quality (0 294) 3 Time remaining (0 63) 4 Release mode (still photography; 0 70) 5 Sound level (0 66) 6 Microphone sensitivity (0 792) 7 Frequency response (0 793) Parts of the Camera 17
Touch Controls 18 • The touch-sensitive monitor offers a variety of controls that can be operated by touching the display with your fingers.
❚❚ Focusing and Releasing the Shutter • Touch the monitor during live view to focus on the selected point (touch AF). • During still photography, the shutter will be released when you lift your finger from the display (touch shutter). • Touch AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon.
❚❚ Adjusting Settings • • • 20 Tap highlighted settings in the display. You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders. Tap Z or press J to select the chosen option and return to the previous display.
❚❚ Playback • Flick left or right to view other pictures during full-frame playback. • In full-frame playback, touching the bottom of the display brings up a frame-advance bar. Slide your finger left or right over the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
• To zoom in on a picture displayed in full-frame playback, use a stretch gesture or give the display two quick taps. After zooming in, you can adjust the zoom ratio using stretch gestures to zoom in and pinch gestures to zoom out. • Use slide gestures to view other parts of the image during zoom. • Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect cancels zoom. • To “zoom out” to a thumbnail view, use a pinch gesture in full-frame playback.
❚❚ Viewing Movies • Movies are indicated by a 1 icon; to start playback, tap the on-screen guide. • Tap the display to pause. Tap again to resume. • Tap Z to exit to full-frame playback. ❚❚ The i Menu When the i menu (0 88) is displayed, you can tap items to view options.
❚❚ Text Entry • When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys. 1 2 1 Text display area 2 Keyboard area 3 Keyboard selection 3 • To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text display area. • To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard selection button.
❚❚ Navigating the Menus • After pressing the G button to display the menus, you can slide up or down to scroll. • Tap a menu icon to choose a menu. • Tap menu items to display options. You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders. • To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
D The Touch Screen • • • • • The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when touched with fingernails or gloved hands. For improved response when using the touch screen with gloves, select [Enabled] for [Touch controls] > [Glove mode] in the setup menu. Do not touch the screen with sharp objects. Do not use excessive force. The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective films. The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple locations.
First Steps Readying the Camera Attaching the Strap To attach a strap (whether the supplied strap or one that has been purchased separately): Readying the Camera 27
Charging the Battery Charge the supplied EN-EL18c battery in the supplied MH-26a battery charger before use. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and 35 minutes. D The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (0 xli) and “Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” (0 1085). 1 Connect the power cable to the charger. 2 Plug the charger in. 3 Remove the battery terminal cover.
4 Remove the contact protector. Slide the contact protector from the charger as shown. 5 Charge the battery.
• Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the direction indicated until it clicks into place. • The lamp for the chamber containing the battery (“L” or “R”) will start to flash as charging begins. • Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops flashing and the charge lamps turn off.
6 Remove the battery and unplug the charger when charging is complete. D Calibration For information on calibrating batteries to ensure the accuracy of the battery level displays, see “Calibrating Batteries” (0 1114). D Warning Indicators If the MH-26a chamber and charge lamps flash on and off in sequence, take the steps described below. • If no battery inserted: There is a problem with the charger. Unplug the charger and consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Inserting the Battery Turn the camera off before inserting or removing the battery. 1 Remove the BL-6 batterychamber cover. Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it to the open (A) position (q) and remove the battery-chamber cover (w). 2 Attach the cover to the battery. 32 • If the battery release is positioned so that the arrow (H) is visible, slide the battery release to cover the arrow (H). • Insert the two projections on the battery into the matching slots in the cover as shown.
3 Insert the battery. Insert the battery fully and securely as shown. 4 Latch the cover. • Rotate the latch to the closed position (q) and fold it down as shown (w). • Be sure the cover is securely latched to prevent the battery from becoming dislodged during operation.
❚❚ Removing the Battery Before removing the battery, turn the camera off, lift the battery-chamber cover latch, and turn it to the open (A) position. D Removing the Battery-Chamber Cover To unlatch the battery-chamber cover so that it can be removed from the battery, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow (H) until it stops. D The Battery-Chamber Cover • Use BL-6 battery-chamber covers only; other battery-chamber covers cannot be used with this camera.
Attaching a Lens • The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G. • Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera. • Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens. - Remove the camera body cap (q, w) and rear lens cap (e, r). - Align the mounting marks on the camera (t) and lens (y).
- Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (u, i). • Remove the lens cap before taking pictures. D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 1044), lock aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number). D Lens Focus Mode If the lens is equipped with a focus mode switch, select autofocus mode (A, M/A, or A/ M). D Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached.
❚❚ Detaching Lenses • After turning the camera off, press and hold the lens release button (q) while turning the lens in the direction shown (w). • After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
Inserting Memory Cards The camera is equipped with two memory card slots: Slot 1 (q) and Slot 2 (w), allowing simultaneous use of two memory cards. • Turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards. • Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card. 1 Open the card slot cover. Open the door protecting the cardslot cover release button (q) and press the release button (w) to open the card slot (e).
2 Insert the memory card. Inserting a card upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card. Check to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation. Holding the card with the rear label toward the monitor, slide it all the way into the slot. When the memory card is fully inserted, the eject button (q) will pop up and the green memory card access lamp (w) will light briefly. 3 Close the card slot cover.
A Two Memory Cards When two memory cards are inserted (one in each of Slots 1 and 2), the role played by the card in Slot 2 can be selected using [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu. • [Overflow]: Pictures will be recorded to the card in Slot 2 only when the card in Slot 1 is full. • [Backup]: Two identical copies are recorded, one to each memory card and each with the same image quality and size.
D Memory Cards • • • • • • • Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera. Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card.
D No Memory Card Inserted If no memory card is inserted, the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and top control panel will show S. If the camera is turned off with a battery and no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the top control panel.
Camera Setup The language option in the setup menu is automatically highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language and set the camera clock. 1 Turn the camera on. 2 Highlight [Language] in the setup menu and press 2. • The [Language] item is automatically highlighted in the setup menu the first time the G button is pressed after purchase. • For information on using the menus, see “Using the Menus” (0 81).
3 Select a language. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired language and press J (the languages available vary with the country or region in which the camera was originally purchased). 4 Highlight [Time zone and date] and press 2. 5 Choose a time zone. • Select [Time zone] in the [Time zone and date] display. • Highlight a time zone in the [Time zone] display and press J.
6 Turn daylight saving time on or off. • Select [Daylight saving time] in the [Time zone and date] display. • Highlight [On] (daylight saving time on) or [Off] (daylight saving time off) and press J. • Selecting [On] advances the clock one hour; to undo the effect, select [Off]. 7 Set the clock. • Select [Date and time] in the [Time zone and date] display. • Press J after using the multi selector to set the clock to the date and time in the selected time zone (note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock).
9 Exit the menus. Lightly press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. D The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about two years. When this battery is low, a B icon will be displayed in the top control panel while the standby timer is on, indicating that it is time to purchase a replacement. For information on replacing the clock battery, see “Replacing the Clock Battery” (0 1083).
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining Before taking photographs, check the battery level and number of exposures remaining. Battery Level Check the battery level before taking photographs. The battery level is shown in the top control panel and viewfinder. Top control panel L K J I Viewfinder — — — — H d H (flashes) d (flashes) Description Battery fully charged. Battery partially discharged. Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare battery. Shutter release disabled.
Memory Card Indicators and Number of Exposures Remaining The top control panel and viewfinder show the number of additional photographs that can be taken at current settings (i.e, the number of exposures remaining). • The top control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a memory card (the example shows the icons displayed when cards are inserted in both slots). • At default settings, [Overflow] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu.
• If two memory cards are inserted, the camera will show the number of additional photographs that can be recorded to the card in Slot 1. When the card in Slot 1 is full, the display will show the number of exposures remaining on the card in Slot 2. • Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred. For example, values in the vicinity of 1400 are shown as 1.4 k. • If the memory card is full or a card error has occurred, the icon for the affected slot will flash.
Basic Photography and Playback Taking Photographs Photographs can be framed in the viewfinder (viewfinder photography) or in the monitor (live view photography). Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder (Viewfinder Photography) 1 Ready the camera. Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera body or lens with your left, bring your elbows in against the sides of your chest.
2 Frame the photograph. • Frame a photograph in the viewfinder. • Position the main subject in the AF-area brackets. 3 Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. • The in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder when the focus operation is complete. Viewfinder display (steady) (steady) (steady) (flashes) • Description The subject is in focus. The focus point is in front of the subject. The focus point is behind the subject. The camera is unable to focus using autofocus.
4 Smoothly press the shutterrelease button the rest of the way down to take the photograph. The memory card access lamp will light while the photograph is being recorded. Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography) The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery. The timer starts when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and expires if no operations are performed for about 6 seconds. The viewfinder display and the shutter speed and aperture indicators in the top control panel turn off when the timer expires. To restart the timer and restore the displays, press the shutter-release button halfway a second time.
A Framing Photos in Portrait (“Tall”) Orientation The camera is equipped with controls for use in portrait (“tall”) orientation, including vertical shutter-release, Fn, and AF-ON buttons, main and sub-command dials, and a multi selector. • 54 Rotate the vertical shooting shutter-release button lock to L to avoid accidentally operating these controls when the camera is in landscape (“wide”) orientation.
Framing Photographs in the Monitor (Live View) 1 Rotate the live view selector to C (live view photography). 2 Press the a button. • The mirror will be raised and live view will start. The viewfinder will go dark and the view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor. • During live view, exposure for movies and photographs can be previewed in the monitor.
3 Ready the camera. Hold the handgrip securely in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left. 4 Frame the photograph. Position the subject near the center of the frame.
5 Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. • Focus locks while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. • If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green. If the camera is unable to focus, for example because the subject is too close to the camera, the focus point will flash red. • To preview exposure in the monitor as shown in the illustration (exposure preview), press the J button.
6 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph. The monitor turns off during shooting. 7 Press the a button to exit live view.
D Shooting in Live View • • • • • Although these effects are not visible in the final pictures, during live view you may notice the following in the monitor: - Moving objects in the display appear distorted (individual subjects such as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally) - Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the display - Bright regions or bands may appear
D The Count-Down Display A count down will appear in the top left corner of the display approximately 30 s before live view ends automatically. • If the timer has been triggered by Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off delay], the count down will be displayed in black starting 30 s before the timer expires, switching to red when there are only 5 s to go.
A Touch Controls Touch controls can be used in place of the shutter-release button to focus and take pictures during live view photography (0 19). A Live View Zoom Preview Press the X button to magnify the view in the monitor up to a maximum of about 11×. • Press X to zoom in, W (M) to zoom out. • A navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. • Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor.
A Previewing Focus During Live View To temporarily select maximum aperture for an improved focus preview during live view, press the Pv button. To return aperture to its original value, press the Pv button again or focus using autofocus. If the shutterrelease button is pressed all the way down to take a picture during focus preview, aperture will return to the original value before the photo is taken. The maximum aperture icon (t) is displayed while maximum aperture is selected.
Recording Movies Live view can be used to record movies. A “Filming” Versus “Recording” Throughout this manual, the terms “filming” and “recording” are used as follows: “filming” is used if the live view selector is rotated to 1, while “recording” refers to the act of shooting footage using the movie-record button. 1 Rotate the live view selector to 1 (movie live view). 2 Press the a button. • The mirror will be raised and live view will start.
3 Press the AF-ON button to focus. • • Focus before beginning recording. Focus can be adjusted by tapping your subject in the monitor. 4 Press the movie-record button to start recording.
• A recording indicator will be displayed in the monitor. The monitor also shows the time remaining, or in other words the approximate amount of new footage that can be recorded to the memory card. 1 2 1 Recording indicator 2 Time remaining • The camera can be refocused during recording by pressing the AF-ON button or by tapping your subject in the monitor. • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone for movie recording. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
5 Press the movie-record button again to end recording. 6 Press the a button to exit live view. D Recording Movies • 66 When filming movies, you may notice the following in the display. These phenomena will also be visible in any footage recorded with the camera.
• • • • • - Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots in the display - Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source - Flicker occurring while power aperture is in use Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you use the X button to zoom in on the view through the lens (0 69) during filming.
D The Count-Down Display A count down will appear in the top left corner of the display approximately 30 s before live view ends automatically. • If the timer has been triggered by Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off delay], the count down will be displayed in black starting 30 s before the timer expires, switching to red when there are only 5 s to go.
A Focusing During Movie Recording Focus can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. A Live View Zoom Preview Press the X button to zoom in on the view in the monitor (0 61). For a 100% zoom ratio during recording, press the X button. Press W (M) to restore the previous zoom ratio.
Taking Photos During Filming Photos can be taken during filming by pressing the shutter-release button all the way down. The resulting photo will have an aspect ratio of 16:9. • A C icon will flash in the display when a photo is taken. • Photos can be taken while recording is in progress. Taking photos does not interrupt movie recording. D Taking Photos During Filming • • • • • • • 70 Note that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus.
Playback Press the K button to view photos and movies recorded with the camera. 1 Press the K button. • A picture will be displayed in the monitor. • The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon. 2 Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. • Additional pictures can also be viewed by flicking a finger left or right over the display (0 21). • To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway.
A Image Review When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu, pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting without the user pressing the K button.
Viewing Movies Movies are indicated by a 1 icon. Tap the a icon in the display or press the center of the multi selector to start playback (a progress bar shows your approximate position in the movie).
❚❚ Movie Playback Operations To Pause Resume Rewind/ advance Start slowmotion playback Description Press 3 to pause playback. Press the center of the multi selector to resume playback when playback is paused or during rewind/ advance. • Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×. • Keep 4 or 2 pressed to skip respectively to the first frame or last frame. • The first frame is indicated by a h in the top right corner of the display, the last frame by a i.
To Description If the movie contains indices, rotating the subcommand dial takes you to the next or previous index. Skip to index • Indices can be added or removed from the [EDIT MOVIE] menu, which can be displayed by pausing playback and pressing the i button. Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (M) to decrease. To display the [EDIT MOVIE] menu, pause playback Trim movie and press the i button. Exit Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Deleting Unwanted Pictures Pictures can be deleted as described below. Note that once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered. 1 Display the picture. • Press the K button to start playback and press 4 or 2 until the desired picture is displayed. • The location of the current image is shown by an icon at the bottom left corner of the display. 2 Delete the picture. 76 • Press the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Uploading Pictures You can upload your pictures to smartphones or tablets (smart devices) or computers. Options for doing so are listed below. For more information, see the following in the Reference Manual: “Connecting to Computers and TVs” (0 445), “Built-in Wireless” (0 457), and “Ethernet/WT-6” (0 514). Uploading Pictures to Smart Devices Use the SnapBridge app to upload pictures using the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
❚❚ The WT-6 Wireless Transmitter Use the optional WT-6 wireless transmitter to connect to wireless networks and upload pictures to computers or ftp servers. The WT-6 offers more reliable wireless connections than the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi. ❚❚ Ethernet Connect to networks using an Ethernet cable attached to the camera’s Ethernet connector and upload pictures to computers or ftp servers.
D The Wireless Transmitter Utility You will need Wireless Transmitter Utility computer software when uploading pictures to a computer via the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi, the WT-6, or an Ethernet connection. D The SnapBridge App and Computer Applications • The SnapBridge app is available from the Apple App Store® and on Google Play™. • Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center. Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the latest version.
Camera Controls The G Button Press the G button to view the menus. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 D [PLAYBACK MENU] 2 C [PHOTO SHOOTING MENU] 1 [MOVIE SHOOTING MENU] A [CUSTOM SETTING MENU] B [SETUP MENU] N [RETOUCH MENU] O [MY MENU] /m [RECENT SETTINGS] * 8 d Help icon 9 Current settings * You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
Using the Menus You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J button. 1 Move cursor up 2 Center of multi selector: select highlighted item 3 Display sub-menu, select highlighted item, or move cursor right 4 Move cursor down 5 Cancel and return to previous menu, or move cursor left 6 J button: select highlighted item 1 Highlight the icon for the current menu. Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu.
2 Select a menu. Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu. 3 Position the cursor in the selected menu. Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4 Highlight a menu item. Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item. 5 Display options. Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
6 Highlight an option. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option. 7 Select the highlighted option. • Press J. To exit without making a selection, press the G button. • To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
D The J Button While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some items for which selection can only be made by pressing J. D Grayed-Out Items • Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray. • In some cases, pressing J when a grayed-out item is highlighted will display a message explaining why the item is unavailable.
D Text Entry A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required. Enter text as described below. 1 2 1 Text display area 2 Keyboard area 3 Keyboard selection 3 • • • • • • • 86 Enter characters at the current cursor position by highlighting them with the multi selector arrow keys and then pressing the center of the multi selector. To move the cursor left or right in the text display area, rotate the main command dial.
A The d (Help) Icon • Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be viewed by pressing the g (h/Q) button. • Press 1 or 3 to scroll. Press g (h/Q) again to return to the menus. • A Touch Controls You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (0 25).
The i Button (the i Menu) For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button or tap the i icon in the live-view display to view the i menu. • Highlight items using the multi selector and press the center of the multi selector to view options. Highlight the desired option and press the center of the multi selector to select and return to the i menu. • To cancel and return to the previous display, press the i button.
D Grayed-Out Items Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray and cannot be selected. A The Command Dials • The main command dial can be used to choose the setting for the item currently highlighted in the i menu. Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial. • Some items can be adjusted by rotating either dial. • Press J to save changes.
The Still Photography i Menu Pressing the i button during still photography displays the items listed below. Highlight the desired item using the multi selector and press J to view options.
A Customizing the i Menu Choose the items displayed in the i menus. Use Custom Settings f1 [Customize i menu] and f2 [Customize i menu (Lv)] to choose the items displayed in viewfinder and live photography, respectively.
The Movie i Menu Pressing the i button during movie recording displays the items listed below. Highlight the desired item using the multi selector and press J to view options.
The Playback i Menu Pressing the i button during playback displays a contextsensitive i menu of frequently-used playback options.
The R Button Use the R button to view shooting information or choose the indicators displayed. Viewfinder Photography During viewfinder photography, you can press the R button to view an information display in the monitor. The display lists such data as shutter speed, aperture, number of exposures remaining, and AF-area mode.
Live View Photography Use the R button to cycle through the following displays: ❚❚ Live View Selector Rotated to C 1 2 3 4 Indicators on Simplified display Histogram * Virtual horizon * Displayed during exposure preview only.
❚❚ Live View Selector Rotated to 1 1 2 3 4 96 Indicators on Simplified display Histogram Virtual horizon The R Button
The Focus-Mode Selector Choose AF for autofocus, M for manual focus.
The AF-Mode Button Choose the AF and AF-area modes. The AF mode determines how the camera focuses in autofocus mode, the AF-area mode how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus. Choosing an AF Mode Hold the AF-mode button and rotate the main command dial. The options available vary with camera settings.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography During viewfinder photography, the selected AF mode is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder. Option AF-S [Single AF] AF-C [Continuous AF] Description Use with stationary subjects. Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
❚❚ Live View Photography and Filming During live view photography and filming, the selected AF mode is displayed in the monitor. Option Description Use with stationary subjects. Focus locks while AF-S [Single AF] the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. For moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to changes in the AF-F [Full-time AF] distance to the subject until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Choosing an AF-Area Mode Hold the AF-mode button and rotate the sub-command dial. The options available vary with the AF mode.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography The selected AF-area mode is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder during viewfinder photography. Option [Single-point AF] [Dynamic-area AF (9 points)]/ [Dynamic-area AF (25 points)]/ [Dynamic-area AF (49 points)]/ [Dynamic-area AF (105 points)] [3D-tracking] 102 The AF-Mode Button Description The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. • Use with stationary subjects.
Option Description The camera focuses using a group of focus points selected by the user. • Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion, and other subjects that are difficult to photograph using [Single-point AF]. [Group-area AF]/ • Use [Group-area AF (C1)] and [Group-area AF [Group-area AF (C2)] to create custom groups in which the (C1)]/[Group-area AF (C2)] number of focus points in each dimension can be chosen using the multi selector.
A Custom Focus Groups: [Group-Area AF (C1)]/[Group-Area AF (C2)] 104 • When [Group-area AF (C1)] or [Group-area AF (C2)] is highlighted, you can adjust the width of the custom focus group by holding the AF-mode button and pressing 4 or 2. Press 1 or 3 to choose the height. The height and width are shown in the top control panel.
❚❚ Live View Photography/Movie Recording The selected AF-area mode is displayed in the monitor during live view photography and filming. Option ! 5 6 n Description The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated by a yellow border. If multiple faces (up to a [Facepriority AF] maximum of 16) are detected, you can choose a subject using the multi selector. • Use for portraits.
❚❚ Manual Focus-Point Selection When an option other than [Auto-area AF], [Face-priority AF], or [Subjecttracking AF] is selected for AF-area mode, you can select the focus point manually. Press the multi selector up, down, left, or right (1342) or diagonally to select the focus point. A Locking Focus-Point Selection Focus-point selection can be locked by rotating the focus selector lock to the “L” position. Focus-point selection can be reenabled by rotating the lock to I.
The AF-ON Button The AF-ON button can be used for focus in autofocus mode. • You can choose the role assigned to the AF-ON button. Use Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom controls] in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button during photography and movie recording, respectively. A The AF-ON Button for Vertical Shooting The AF-ON button performs the same function, but can only be used when the vertical shooting shutter-release button lock is unlocked.
The I Button Choose an exposure mode. Choosing an Exposure Mode Hold the I button and rotate the main command dial. P S A M 108 Mode Programmed auto Shutterpriority auto Aperturepriority auto Manual The I Button Description The camera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure. You choose the shutter speed; the camera selects the aperture for best results. You choose the aperture; the camera selects the shutter speed for best results. You control both shutter speed and aperture.
The Release Mode Dial and S Button Rotate the release mode dial to choose the operation performed when the shutter is released. Choosing a Release Mode Press the release mode dial lock release on top of the camera and rotate the release mode dial. Mode S Single frame CL Continuous low speed CH Continuous high speed Description The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed. The camera takes photos at a selected rate while the shutter-release button is pressed.
Mode Description Take pictures more quietly than in singleQuiet shutter frame mode. Burst shooting at rates of 1 to 5 Q release fps is also supported. Take pictures with the self-timer. E Self-timer The mirror is raised before shooting to MUP Mirror up minimize blur caused by camera shake. Quick release- The release mode can be selected by holding the S button and rotating the main command S mode selection dial.
The Y Button Use the Y button to choose how the camera meters light when setting exposure. Choosing a Metering Option Hold the Y button and rotate the main command dial. Option [Matrix L metering] [CenterM weighted metering] Description Matrix metering is adapted to a wide range of subjects. It produces natural-looking results. The camera assigns the greatest weight to the center of the frame. It can be used with subjects that dominate the composition, for example.
Option N [Spot metering] [Highlightt weighted metering] 112 The Y Button Description The camera meters a circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). Use for example to meter a specific area of the frame when your subject is backlit or features sharply contrasting areas. The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on stage.
The BKT Button Use the BKT button to choose the bracketing increment and number of shots in the bracketing program. Bracketing is used to vary exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting (ADL) over a series of shots. • The role performed by the BKT button can be chosen using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
The S (Q) Button Use the S (Q) button to adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity). The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures. You also have the option of enabling auto ISO sensitivity control, which automatically adjusts sensitivity if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the setting selected by the user. Adjusting ISO Sensitivity Hold the S (Q) button and rotate the main command dial.
D High ISO Sensitivities The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the sensitivity, the more likely the image is to be affected by “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Hold the S (Q) button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose whether the camera will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity if the desired exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user. • When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, ISO AUTO indicators will appear in the top control panel and viewfinder. When these indicators are lit (not flashing), pictures will be taken at the sensitivity selected for [ISO sensitivity].
The E Button Use the E (exposure compensation) button to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera. Exposure compensation can be used to make pictures brighter or darker. −1 EV No exposure compensation +1 EV Adjusting Exposure Compensation Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial. • • Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker. Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0.0.
The T Button The T button is used to adjust image quality and choose the size of JPEG images. Adjusting Image Quality Hold the T button and rotate the main command dial. Option [NEF (RAW) + JPEG finec] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normalc] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicc] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic] [NEF (RAW)] 118 The T Button Description Record two copies of each photo: an NEF (RAW) image and a JPEG copy.
Option [JPEG finec] [JPEG fine] [JPEG normalc] [JPEG normal] [JPEG basicc] [JPEG basic] Description Record photos in JPEG format. Image quality increases as quality progress from basic through normal to fine. Options with a star (“c”) prioritize image quality, those without a star (“c”) file size.
Choosing an Image Size Hold the T button and rotate the sub-command dial. • Choose from [Large], [Medium], and [Small]; the selected option applies to JPEG photos. The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels varies with image area. Image area [FX (36×24)] [1.
The U Button The U button can be used to adjust white balance. White balance delivers natural colors with light sources of different hues. Adjusting White Balance Hold the U button and rotate the main command dial. Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the U button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Option v [Auto] v0 [Keep white (reduce warm colors)] v1 [Keep overall atmosphere] v2 [Keep warm lighting colors] D [Natural light auto] H [Direct sunlight] G [Cloudy] M [Shade] J [Incandescent] 122 The U Button Description White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources. Eliminate the warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting. Partially preserve the warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting.
Option I [Fluorescent] [Sodium-vapor lamps] [Warm-white fluorescent] [White fluorescent] [Cool-white fluorescent] [Day white fluorescent] [Daylight fluorescent] [High temp. mercuryvapor] N [Flash] K [Choose color temperature] L [Preset manual] Description Use under fluorescent lighting; choose the bulb type according to the light source. Use for flash photography. Choose the color temperature directly.
A Fine-Tuning White Balance To fine-tune white balance, use the multi selector while holding the U button. • When an option other than [Choose color temperature] or [Preset manual] is selected, you can fine-tune white balance on the amber-blue axis by pressing 4 or 2 and on the green-magenta axis by pressing 1 or 3. • When [Choose color temperature] is selected, you can press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit. Press 1 or 3 to change. • Release the U button to return to shooting mode.
The g (h/Q) Button Use the g (h/Q) button to choose image processing (“Picture Control”) options for new photos according to the scene or your creative intent. Choosing a Picture Control Pressing the g (h/Q) button displays Picture Control options. Highlight an option using 4 or 2 and press J to select. Option n Q R S T Description The camera automatically adjusts hues and [Auto] tones based on the [Standard] Picture Control. Standard processing for balanced results.
Option o [Portrait] p [Landscape] q [Flat] l01 Creative Picture l20 Control 126 The g (h/Q) Button Description Smooth complexions for natural-looking portraits. Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes. Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched. Creative Picture Controls offer unique combinations of hue, tone, saturation, and other settings tuned for particular effects.
❚❚ Modifying Picture Controls To modify Picture Control settings, highlight a Picture Control and press 3. • Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the subcommand dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25. • The options available vary with the Picture Control selected. • Default settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button. • Press J to save changes.
❚❚ Picture Control Settings Option Description Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture [Effect level] Controls. Quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid[Quick sharp] range sharpening], and [Clarity]. These parameters can also be adjusted individually. [Sharpening] Control the sharpness of details and outlines. [Mid-range Adjust the sharpness of patterns and lines in the range sharpening] between [Sharpening] and [Clarity].
D The j Indicator The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting. D [A] (Auto) • Selecting the [A] (auto) option available for some settings lets the camera adjust the setting automatically. • Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.
A The [Auto] Picture Control Settings can be adjusted in the range [A−2] to [A+2]. A Protecting Pictures from Deletion During playback, the g (h/Q) button can be used to protect pictures. Protecting pictures helps prevent accidental deletion. A Viewing Help Press the g (h/Q) button to view help for the current item, where available (0 87).
The W (N) Button During shooting, the W (N) button can be used to choose the flash mode and adjust flash compensation for optional flash units. Flash mode determines the effect produced by the flash, flash compensation the flash level. Choosing a Flash Mode Hold the W (N) button and rotate the main command dial. Option [Fill flash] (frontcurtain sync) [Red-eye reduction] (redeye reduction) [Slow sync] (slow sync) Description This mode is recommended for most situations.
s 132 Option [Slow sync + redeye] (red-eye reduction with slow sync) [Rear-curtain sync] (rear-curtain sync) [Flash off] The W (N) Button Description As for “red-eye reduction”, except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting at night or under low light. The flash fires just before the shutter closes. The flash does not fire.
Adjusting Flash Compensation Hold the W (N) button and rotate the sub-command dial. • Choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit. • Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
The Pv Button Pressing the Pv button during viewfinder photography stops lens aperture down to the current value, allowing depth of field to be previewed as long as the button is kept pressed. • Optional flash units compatible with the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) will emit a modeling flash. The modeling flash can be disabled by selecting [Off] for Custom Setting e6 [Modeling flash]. • You can choose the role assigned to the Pv button.
The Fn1, Fn2, Fn3 (C), and Fn (Vertical) Buttons Use the Fn1, Fn2, Fn3 (C), or vertical Fn button for quick access to selected settings. • The assigned setting can be adjusted by holding the corresponding button and rotating the command dials. In some cases, adjustments can be made using both the main and sub-command dials.
Shooting Settings Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size) Adjusting Image Area Settings Image area settings can be displayed by selecting [Image area] in the photo shooting menu.
❚❚ Choose Image Area Choose the image area. The following options are available: Option c [FX(36×24)] Z [1.2×(30×20)] a [DX(24×16)] b [5:4(30×24)] m [1:1(24×24)] Z [16:9(36×20)] Description Record pictures in FX format with an angle of view equivalent to a 35 mm format camera. Use this option when taking photographs with NIKKOR lenses for 35 mm format cameras. Reduces the angle of view of the lens mounted on the camera to that of a lens with a focal length approximately 1.2 times longer.
1 2 3 4 138 FX (36×24) 1.
❚❚ Auto DX Crop Choose whether the camera automatically selects the [DX (24×16)] (DX format) image area when a DX lens is attached. Option [On] [Off] Description The camera automatically selects the [DX (24×16)] (DX format) image area when a DX lens is attached. Automatic image-area selection disabled. D Cropping DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller angle of view than lenses for 35 mm format cameras.
A The Viewfinder Display The viewfinder displays for image area options other than [FX (36×24)] are shown below. The area outside the current crop is shown in gray. 140 1.
A Choosing the Image Area via Buttons and Command Dials If [Choose image area] has been assigned to a button using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls], the image area can be selected by pressing the button and rotating a command dial. • The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder. • The option currently selected for image area can be displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder by pressing the button to which [Choose image area] is assigned.
Adjusting Image Quality Choose the image quality option used when photographs are recorded. Option [NEF (RAW) + JPEG finec] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normalc] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicc] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic] 142 Description Record two copies of each photo: an NEF (RAW) image and a JPEG copy. • For the JPEG copy, you can choose from options prioritizing image quality or file size. Choose options with a star (“c”) to maximize image quality.
Option [NEF (RAW)] [JPEG finec] [JPEG fine] [JPEG normalc] [JPEG normal] [JPEG basicc] [JPEG basic] Description Record photos in NEF (RAW) format. Record photos in JPEG format. ”Fine” produces higher quality pictures than ”normal” and ”normal” higher quality pictures than “basic”. • Choose options with a star (“c”) to maximize image quality. Choose options without a star (“c”) to ensure that the JPEG copies all have more or less the same file size. A NEF (RAW) • NEF (RAW) files have the extension “*.
❚❚ Choosing an Image Quality Option To choose an image quality option during viewfinder photography, hold the T button and rotate the main command dial. The selected option is displayed in the rear control panel. A The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Quality] Option Image quality can also be adjusted using the [Image quality] item in the photo shooting menu. Use the [Image quality] item in the photo shooting menu to adjust image quality during live view.
Choosing an Image Size Choose a size for new JPEG pictures. The size for JPEG pictures can be selected from [Large], [Medium], and [Small]. The number of pixels in the image varies with the option selected for image area (0 136). Image area [FX (36×24)] [1.
Image area [5:4 (30×24)] [1:1 (24×24)] [16:9 (36×20)] Image size Large (4640 × 3712 pixels) Medium (3472 × 2784 pixels) Small (2320 × 1856 pixels) Large (3712 × 3712 pixels) Medium (2784 × 2784 pixels) Small (1856 × 1856 pixels) Large (5568 × 3128 pixels) Medium (4176 × 2344 pixels) Small (2784 × 1560 pixels) A Print Size Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = 2.54 cm).
❚❚ Choosing an Image Size To choose a size for JPEG images during viewfinder photography, hold the T button and rotate the subcommand dial. The selected option is displayed in the rear control panel. • To choose a size for NEF (RAW) images, use the [Image size] > [NEF (RAW)] option in the photo shooting menu. A The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Size] Option • Image size can also be adjusted using the [Image size] > [JPEG] and [NEF (RAW)] options in the photo shooting menu.
Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus) Choosing a Focus Mode Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF to select autofocus or to M to select manual focus. During viewfinder photography, the camera focuses using 105 focus points.
Autofocus Mode Choose how the camera focuses in autofocus mode. ❚❚ Viewfinder Photography Option AF-S [Single AF] AF-C [Continuous AF] Description Use with stationary subjects. Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The shutter cannot be released unless the camera is in focus. • At default settings, the shutter can be released only when the camera is in focus (focus priority). Use for shots of athletes and other moving subjects.
A Predictive Focus Tracking In autofocus mode AF-C, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
❚❚ Live View Photography and Filming Option AF-S [Single AF] AF-F [Full-time AF] Description Use with stationary subjects. Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Use with moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject motion until the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus locks when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway.
❚❚ Choosing an Autofocus Mode To choose the autofocus mode, hold the AF-mode button and rotate the main command dial. • During viewfinder photography, the selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. • During live view or while movies are being filmed, the selected option is displayed in the monitor.
AF-Area Mode Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus. ❚❚ Viewfinder Photography Option Description The user selects the focus point (0 164). The camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point [Single-point only. AF] • Use with stationary subjects. The user selects the focus point, but if the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points.
Option [3D-tracking] 154 Description The camera tracks the subject using all 105 focus points. If you keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway after focusing on the subject in the selected focus point, the camera will track the subject as it moves through the frame and select new focus points as required. 3D-tracking is available when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode. • Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players).
Option Description The camera focuses using a group of focus points selected by the user. Focus is distributed over a wider area, reducing the risk of the camera focusing on the background. • Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion, and other subjects that are difficult to photograph [Group-area AF]/[Group-area using [Single-point AF].
Option [Auto-area AF] 156 Description The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point. If a face is detected, the camera will give priority to the portrait subject. • Use on occasions when you don’t have time to select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment photos. • When AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, the active focus points are briefly highlighted after the camera focuses.
D AF-Area Mode AF-area mode is shown in the viewfinder and top control panel.
AF-area mode Top control panel Viewfinder Viewfinder focuspoint display (during selection) [Group-area AF] [Group-area AF (C1)] [Group-area AF (C2)] [Auto-area AF] * Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation.
A 3D-Tracking When [3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode, the camera stores the colors in the area surrounding the focus point at the moment the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame.
❚❚ Live View Photography and Filming Option ! 5 6 n 160 Description The camera automatically detects and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated by a yellow border. If multiple faces (up to a maximum of 16) are detected, you can choose a [Facesubject using the multi selector. priority AF] • Use for portraits. • If the camera can no longer detect the subject, for example because they have looked away, it will cease to display the yellow border.
D Subject-Tracking AF The camera may be unable to track subjects that: • are similar in color to the background, • change visibly in size, color, or brightness, • are too large or too small, • are too bright or too dark, • move quickly, or • are obscured by other objects or leave the frame.
D Using Autofocus in Live View • The camera may take longer to focus in live view than during viewfinder photography.
❚❚ Choosing an AF-Area Mode To choose the AF-area mode, hold the AF-mode button and rotate the sub-command dial. • During viewfinder photography, the selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. • During live view or while movies are being filmed, the selected option is displayed in the monitor.
Focus Point Selection Except when [Auto-area AF] or [Subject tracking AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the focus point can be selected manually, allowing photographs to be composed with the subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame. 1 Undo the focus selector lock. Rotate the focus selector lock to I. 2 Use the multi selector to select the focus point while the standby timer is on. • During viewfinder photography, you can choose from 105 focus points in the AF-area brackets.
• During live view, the focus point can be positioned anywhere in the frame. • The center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector. • Focus-point selection can be locked by rotating the focus selector lock to the L position.
A The Sub-Selector • The sub-selector can be used for focus-point selection in place of the multi selector. • Exposure and focus lock while the center of the sub-selector is pressed. • Be careful not to put your fingers in your eye while using the sub-selector. A Portrait Orientation You may find it convenient to use the vertical multi selector when taking photographs in portrait orientation. See Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] > [Multi selector for vertical shooting].
Custom Focus Groups You can choose the dimensions of the focus groups used when [Group-area AF (C1)] and [Group-area AF (C2)] are selected for AF-area mode. Custom focus groups can be used if the size and shape of the area used for focus can be determined in advance with a fair degree of accuracy. 1 Choose [Group-area AF (C1)] or [Group-area AF (C2)] for AFarea mode. 2 Choose the dimensions of the custom focus group.
• Press 1 or 3 to choose the height, 4 or 2 to choose the width. The shape of the current AF-area group is indicated by a number in the top control panel. The shapes of the different AF-area groups are shown below. 1–7 3–7 5–7 7–7 1–5 3–5 5–5 7–5 3–3 5–3 7–3 11–3 15–3 5–1 7–1 11–1 15–1 • The changes are saved when you release the AF-mode button.
A Choosing Custom Focus Groups The dimensions of the custom focus groups for [Group-area AF (C1)] and [Group-area AF (C2)] can also be selected using Custom Setting a10 [Custom groupings (C1/C2)]. Select the desired custom group AF-area mode and size the group using the multi selector. Press J to save changes.
Focus Lock Use focus lock with subjects that will not be in the selected focus point in the final composition or to focus in cases in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus (0 173). Before using focus lock, choose an option other than [Auto-area AF] for AF-area mode. 1 Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway. The in-focus indicator (I) will be displayed when the camera focuses.
2 Lock focus. AF-C selected for autofocus mode: Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway (q), press the center of the sub-selector (w) to lock focus. Focus and exposure will remain locked while the center of the subselector is pressed, even if you remove your finger from the shutterrelease button. An AE-L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder while the center of the sub-selector is pressed. AF-S selected for autofocus mode: Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
3 Without releasing focus lock, recompose the photograph and press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject. If the distance to the subject changes, release the lock and focus again at the new distance. A Taking Multiple Shots at the Same Focus Distance • If you locked focus by pressing the shutter-release button halfway, focus will remain locked if you keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway between shots.
A Locking Focus with the AF-ON Button • The AF-ON button can be used for focus in place of the shutter-release button. • If [AF-ON only] is selected for Custom Setting a6 [AF activation] during viewfinder photography, focus can be initiated only by pressing the AF-ON button; the camera will not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus will remain locked after the AF-ON button is released. To end focus lock, press the AF-ON button again.
Manual Focus The procedure for selecting manual focus varies with the lens. Follow the steps below. • AF lenses: Rotate the camera focus-mode selector to M. If the lens is equipped with a focus-mode switch, set it to M as well. - If you are using an AF-S lens, or an AF-P lens with a focus-mode switch, set the focusmode switch to M. In this case, there is no need to choose manual focus on the camera. • Manual focus lenses: Manual focus is available at all times.
D Using Manual Focus with AF Lenses (AF-S and AF-P Lenses Excluded) Be sure to rotate the camera focus-mode selector to M when using manual focus with AF lenses (AF-S and AF-P lenses excepted). Attempting to focus manually with the focus-mode selector set to AF could damage the camera or lens.
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder When focusing manually, you can use the focus indicator (I) in the viewfinder to check whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus. • In-focus indicator (I) is displayed when the subject is in focus. Focus indicator (steady) (steady) (steady) (flashes) Status The subject is in focus. The focus point is in front of the subject. The focus point is behind the subject. The camera is unable to focus.
A AF-P Lenses When an AF-P lens is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus indicator will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point will flash in the monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus ring in the current direction will not bring the subject into focus. A The Focal Plane Mark and Flange-Back Distance Focus distance is measured from the focal plane mark (E) on the camera body, which shows the position of the focal plane inside the camera (q).
Exposure-Related Settings (Metering and Exposure Compensation) Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. Choose the method used and area metered when the camera sets exposure. Option L [Matrix metering] [CenterM weighted metering] 178 Description Produces natural results in most situations.
Option N [Spot metering] [Highlightt weighted metering] Description The camera meters a circle with a diameter of 4 mm/0.16 in. (equivalent to approximately 1.5% of the frame). This ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed even when the background is much brighter or darker. The metered area is centered on the current focus point.
❚❚ Choosing a Metering Option Hold the Y button and rotate the main command dial. The selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel.
A [Matrix Metering] and Lens Type The metering method used when matrix metering is selected varies with the lens. • CPU lenses: - 3D color matrix metering III: Available with type D, E, and G CPU lenses. The camera includes distance information when calculating exposure. - Color matrix metering III: Available with CPU lenses of types other than D, E, and G. Distance information is not included.
Choosing an Exposure Mode To choose an exposure mode, hold the I button and rotate the main command dial. The selected option is displayed in the top control panel. Mode P S A M 182 Description Use for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera Programmed settings. The camera chooses both shutter auto (0 184) speed and aperture automatically. Use to freeze or blur motion.
D Lens Types • When using a CPU lens of a type other than G or E, lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). • Mode A will be selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached in mode P or S.
❚❚ P (Programmed Auto) In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations. You also have the option of choosing different combinations of shutter speed and aperture without altering exposure (“flexible program”).
❚❚ S (Shutter-Priority Auto) In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically adjusts aperture for optimal exposure. Choose fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects. To choose a shutter speed, rotate the main command dial while the exposure meters are on. • Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to values between s (o) and 30 s (q). • Shutter speed can be locked at the selected value (0 194).
❚❚ A (Aperture-Priority Auto) In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure. To adjust aperture, rotate the sub-command dial while the exposure meters are on. • The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens. • Aperture can be locked at the selected value (0 186 Exposure-Related Settings (Metering and Exposure Compensation) 194).
A Non-CPU Lenses If when using a non-CPU lens you enter its maximum aperture using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in setup menu, the current f-number will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. Although other values can be selected, the value shown in the displays will be rounded to the nearest full aperture stop.
❚❚ M (Manual) You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode for long time-exposures of such subjects as fireworks or the night sky (“Bulb” or “Time” photography, 0 191). Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted with reference to the exposure indicators by rotating the command dials as follows while the standby timer is on: • Rotate the main command dial to choose the shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 s (o) and 30 s (q), to A (“Bulb”) or % (“Time”), or to p.
Shutter speed: A Extended Shutter Speeds For shutter speeds as slow as 900 s (15 minutes), select [On] for Custom Setting d7 [Extended shutter speeds (M)]. A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Users of external exposure meters need not take the exposure ratio into account when adjusting aperture via the sub-command dial. Users will however need to consider the exposure ratio when using the lens aperture ring.
A Exposure Indicators The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel show whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.
Long Time-Exposures (Mode M Only) The camera offers two options for long time-exposures: “Bulb” and “Time”. Long time-exposures can be used for pictures of fireworks, night scenery, the stars, or moving lights. A 35-second exposure shot at a shutter speed of “Bulb” and an aperture of f/25 Shutter speed Bulb Time Description The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down.
1 Keep the camera steady, for example by using a tripod. 2 Hold the I button and rotate the main command dial to select mode M. 3 Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of A (“Bulb”) or % (“Time”). Note that the exposure indicators are not displayed at a shutter speed of A or %.
4 Focus and start the exposure. • “Bulb”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the exposure. Keep the shutter-release button pressed during the exposure. • “Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the exposure. 5 End the exposure. • “Bulb”: Lift your finger from the shutter-release button. • “Time”: Press the shutter-release button all the way down a second time.
Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock You can lock shutter speed (mode S), aperture (mode A), or both shutter speed and aperture (mode M). Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode P. 1 Assign [Shutter spd & aperture lock] to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls]. 2 Lock shutter speed and/or aperture.
Aperture: • After confirming that camera is in mode A or M, press the control to which [Shutter spd & aperture lock] has been assigned and rotate the sub-command dial until P (aperture lock) icons appear in the viewfinder and top control panel. • To unlock aperture, press the control to which [Shutter spd & aperture lock] has been assigned and rotate the sub-command dial until the P icons are no longer displayed.
Autoexposure Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after setting exposure for a specific area of the subject. Exposure lock comes in handy when the area used to set exposure is much brighter or darker than its surroundings. 1 Select [Center-weighted metering] or [Spot metering] (0 178). 2 With the subject positioned in the selected focus point and the shutter-release button pressed halfway, press the center of the sub-selector to lock exposure.
• If you are using autofocus, you should also confirm that the infocus indicator (I) is displayed. 3 Keeping the center of the subselector pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot. A Locking Exposure with the Shutter-Release Button If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L], exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
A Metered Area • In [Spot metering], exposure will be locked at the value metered in a circle centered on the current focus point (0 178). • In [Center-weighted metering], exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
Exposure Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera. It can be used to make pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when used with [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted metering] (0 178).
❚❚ Adjusting Exposure Compensation Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial. • The selected value is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. • Choose from values between –5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure). • By default, changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV. The size of the increments can be changed using Custom Setting b3 [Exp./flash comp. step value]. • In general, positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker.
• The current value is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel when the E button is pressed. Display No exposure compensation (E button pressed) −0.3 EV +2 EV Top control panel Viewfinder • E icons and exposure indicators appear in the viewfinder and top control panel. In modes other than M, the zero (“0”) at the center of the exposure indicator flashes. • Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0.0.
A Mode M In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change. A Using a Flash When an optional flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the background; if desired, the effect can be restricted to the background using Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for flash].
Choosing the Operation Performed When the Shutter Is Released (Release Mode) Choosing a Release Mode Such as SingleFrame, Continuous, or Quiet Shutter-Release To choose the operation performed when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down, hold the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial. • Stop when the pointer aligns with the desired setting.
Mode Description The camera takes photographs at a selected rate while the shutter-release button is pressed. Use for active subjects. Continuous CH • Choose from rates of from 10 to 14 fps. high speed • To choose the frame rate, hold the S button and rotate the sub-command dial. The mirror stays raised while the shutterrelease button is fully pressed. Not only can you control the timing of the click made when the mirror is lowered, but the click itself is quieter than in single-frame mode.
S Mode Description Quick release- Hold the S button and rotate the main mode command dial to select the release mode selection (0 208). D Frame Advance Rate • The frame rates for CL and CH modes and for burst photography in mode Q can also be selected using Custom Setting d1 [Continuous shooting speed]. • The maximum frame advance rate when [On] is selected for [Silent live view photography] during live view is approximately 10.5 fps, even if rates of from 11 to 14 fps are selected in CH mode.
D Burst Photography • Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the memory card access lamp may light for anywhere from a few tens of seconds to around a minute. Do not remove the memory card while the memory card access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded images be lost, but the camera or memory card could be damaged. • If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit, it will not power off until all images in the buffer have been recorded.
A The Memory Buffer • While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the frame-count display will show the number of pictures that can be stored in the memory buffer. • When the buffer is full, the display will show t00 and the frame rate will drop. • The number shown is approximate. The actual number of photos that can be stored in the memory buffer varies with camera settings and shooting conditions. • Memory buffer capacity may drop briefly immediately after the camera is turned on.
❚❚ Quick Release-Mode Selection With the release mode dial rotated to S, you can choose a release mode by holding the S button and rotating the main command dial. • Settings for the selected mode can be adjusted by holding the S button and rotating the sub-command dial. • The selected options are shown in the rear control panel.
Using the Self-Timer (E) 1 Rotate the release mode dial to E (selftimer mode). Hold the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to E. 2 Frame the photograph and focus. The timer will not start if the shutter cannot be released, as may be the case, for example, if the camera is unable to focus when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode.
3 Start the timer. • Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the timer; the shutter will be released after about 10 seconds, during which the selftimer lamp will at first flash for approximately 8 seconds and then light for roughly 2 seconds. • To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the release mode dial to another setting. • The timer duration, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots can be selected using Custom Setting c3 [Self-timer].
Mirror Up Mode (MUP) Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by vibrations produced as the mirror is raised. • Hold the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to MUP (mirror up). • After pressing the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror. Z will be displayed in the control panels. • Press the shutter-release button all the way down a second time to take the picture.
D Mirror Up • • Photos cannot be framed in the viewfinder. Autofocus and metering are not available. A Taking Pictures • Use of a tripod is recommended. Press the shutter-release button smoothly to prevent blur. The mirror lowers when shooting ends. • A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised. • In live view, the picture is taken the first time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
Adjusting the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light (ISO Sensitivity) ISO Sensitivity The camera’s sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) can be adjusted according to the amount of light available. In general, choosing higher values allows faster shutter speeds at the same aperture. Choose from settings of from ISO 100 to 102400. Extended settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 5 EV above ISO 102400 are also available.
A The Photo Shooting Menu [ISO Sensitivity Settings] Option ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity settings] item in the photo shooting menu. A High ISO Sensitivities The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion.
A Hi 0.3–Hi 5 A setting of [Hi 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately 0.3 EV higher than ISO 102400 (ISO 128000) and [Hi 5.0] to an ISO sensitivity approximately 5 EV higher (ISO 3280000). Note that pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to “noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines. A Lo 0.3–Lo 1 [Lo 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity about 0.3 EV below ISO 100 (equivalent to ISO 80). [Lo 1.0] is roughly 1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 50).
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user. ❚❚ Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control 1 Select [ISO sensitivity settings] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Auto ISO sensitivity control] and press 2. 2 Select [On]. • Highlight [On] and press J to enable auto ISO sensitivity control. If a flash is used, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted appropriately.
3 Adjust settings. • Adjust auto ISO sensitivity control settings. Option [Maximum sensitivity] [Maximum sensitivity with N] Description To prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high, you can select an upper limit for ISO sensitivity control; choose from values of from ISO 200 to Hi 5. The minimum value that will be selected using auto ISO sensitivity control is ISO 100. Choose the maximum ISO sensitivity for flash photography; options range from ISO 200 to Hi 5.
Option Description In modes P and A, auto ISO sensitivity control only takes effect if the shutter speed needed for optimal exposure would fall below this value; choose from settings of 1/4000 s to 30 s. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on lens focal length (CPU lenses only). For example, the camera will automatically choose faster minimum shutter speeds to prevent blur caused by camera shake when a long lens is attached.
When [On] is selected for [Auto ISO sensitivity control], ISO AUTO indicators will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel. When these indicators are lit (not flashing), pictures will be taken at the sensitivity selected for [ISO sensitivity]. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, the ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be shown in the displays.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control • If value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity] is higher than that chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the value chosen for [ISO sensitivity] will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control. • During flash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range defined by the values selected for Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and e2 [Flash shutter speed].
Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources (White Balance) White Balance Adjusting settings for natural colors under different light sources is referred to as “matching white balance to the light source”. The default setting (v) is suitable for use with most light sources, but if it fails to produce the desired results, other settings can be selected according to the weather or light source.
Option Color temperature * Description v0 [Keep white (reduce warm colors)] v1 [Keep overall atmosphere] v2 [Keep warm lighting colors] Eliminate the warm color cast Approx. 3500– produced by incandescent 8000 K lighting. Partially preserve the warm color Approx. 3500– cast produced by incandescent 8000 K lighting. Preserve the warm color cast Approx. 3500– produced by incandescent 8000 K lighting. White balance is adjusted for nonartificial light sources, producing D [Natural light Approx.
Option I [Fluorescent] [Sodium-vapor lamps] [Warm-white fluorescent] [White fluorescent] [Cool-white fluorescent] [Day white fluorescent] [Daylight fluorescent] [High temp. mercury-vapor] N [Flash] K [Choose color temperature] Color temperature * Description Approx. 2700 K Approx. 3000 K Approx. 3700 K Use under fluorescent lighting; choose bulb type according to Approx. 4200 K light source. Approx. 5000 K Approx. 6500 K Approx. 7200 K Approx. 5400 K Use for flash photography.
Option Color temperature * L [Preset manual] Description Measure white balance directly from a subject or light source or copy white balance from an existing photograph. • To choose a white balance preset, hold the U button and rotate the sub-command dial. • To enter direct measurement mode, press and hold the U button (0 234). * Values when fine-tuning is set to 0.
❚❚ Choosing a White Balance Option To choose a white balance option, hold the U button and rotate the main command dial. The selected option is displayed in the rear control panel. Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the U button and rotating the sub-command dial. D Studio Flash Lighting [Auto] may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to [Flash] and use finetuning to adjust white balance.
A The [White Balance] Options White balance can also be adjusted from the photo and movie shooting menus. A [Natural Light Auto] [Natural light auto] may not produce the desired results under artificial light. Choose [Auto] or an option that matches the light source. A Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer; some may have a red cast while others appear blue. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, expressed in Kelvins (K).
Fine-Tuning White Balance 1 Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, highlight the desired option, and press 2 as often as necessary to display finetuning options. For information on fine-tuning [Preset manual] white balance, see “Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance” (0 248).
2 Fine-tune white balance. • Use the multi selector to position the cursor on the grid. The cursor can be moved up to six steps from the center along either of the A (amber)–B (blue) and G (green)–M (magenta) axes. The selected value is displayed to the right of the grid. • The A (amber)–B (blue) axis corresponds to color temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
A The Information Display During viewfinder photography, you can press the U button to adjust white balance settings in the information display. • Rotate the main command dial to choose the white balance mode. When [Auto] or [Fluorescent] is selected, you can choose an [Auto] or [Fluorescent] sub-option by rotating the sub-command dial. • When [Choose color temperature] is selected, you can rotate the subcommand dial to choose the color temperature.
A White Balance Fine-Tuning The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. Selecting more of a color on a given axis does not necessarily result in that color appearing in pictures. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as [Incandescent] is selected will make pictures slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue. A “Mired” Values in mired are calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6.
Choosing a Color Temperature ❚❚ Using the Menus Choose a color temperature by entering values for the A (amber)–B (blue) and G (green)–M (magenta) axes. 1 Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then highlight [Choose color temperature] and press 2. 2 Choose a color temperature. • Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and press 1 or 3 to change. • Press 4 or 2 to highlight the value for the green (G)–magenta (M) axis and press 1 or 3 to change.
3 Save changes. • Press J to save changes and exit to the menus. • If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)–magenta (M) axis, an asterisk (“U”) will appear in the rear control panel.
❚❚ Using Buttons (Amber–Blue Only) To adjust color temperature when [Choose color temperature] is selected for white balance, hold the U button and use the multi selector or rotate the sub-command dial. • Hold the U button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose a color temperature in mireds. • To highlight a digit, hold the U button and press 4 or 2. Press 1 or 3 to edit the highlighted digit. • Changes apply only to the A (amber)–B (blue) axis.
Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance values measured under specific lighting or copied from a photograph. It is recommended under mixed lighting or lighting with a strong color cast or whenever settings such as [Auto], [Incandescent], and color-temperature selection fail to produce the desired results. The camera can store up to six values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-6.
❚❚ Viewfinder Photography Before Measuring White Balance: • Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard 18% gray panel can be used as a reference object. • Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when white balance is measured using a neutral gray or white reference object. In mode M, adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 190).
2 Select a preset. Hold the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed. 3 Select direct measurement mode. • Release the U button briefly and then press the U button until the D indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel and the L icon in the rear control panel start to flash.
• In direct measurement mode, the focus point changes to a white balance target as shown and stays in the center of the frame. 4 Before the D indicators stop flashing, photograph the reference object. • Position the reference object in the white balance target and press the shutter-release button all the way down to measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 2.
5 Check the results. • If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance, C will flash in the top and rear control panels, while the viewfinder will show a flashing a. Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to shooting mode. • If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will appear in the viewfinder and in the top and rear control panels.
D Time Limit (Viewfinder Photography) If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer]. A Measuring White Balance (Viewfinder Photography) Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during: • multiple exposures, • interval-timer photography, • time-lapse movie recording, or • focus shift.
A Protected Presets If the current preset is protected, the camera will be unable to measure a value for preset manual white balance; any attempt to measure white balance for a protected preset will be accompanied by a flashing 3 in the viewfinder and top control panel and a flashing g in the rear control panel. A Presets • At shipment, presets d-1 through d-6 are set to 5200 K, equivalent to the “direct sunlight” white balance option.
❚❚ Live View (Spot White Balance) During live view, white balance can be measured from white or gray objects in a smaller area of the frame than would be possible in viewfinder photography (spot white balance). As long as the subject contain a white or gray area, you will not have to prepare a reference object or change lenses during telephoto photography. • When measuring preset manual white balance for flash photography, use the viewfinder as described in “Viewfinder Photography” (0 235).
2 Select a preset. Hold the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed. 3 Select direct measurement mode. Release the U button briefly and then press the U button until the L icon in the monitor starts to flash.
4 While the L icon is flashing, use the multi selector to position the spot white balance target (r) over a white or gray area of the subject. To zoom in on the area around the target (r) for more precise positioning, press the X button. 5 Measure a value for preset white balance either by pressing the center of the multi selector or by pressing the shutter-release button all the way down. • If the camera is able to measure white balance, the new value will be reflected in the display.
• If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message will be displayed and the camera will return to Step 4. Try measuring white balance again, for example with the target (r) positioned over a different area of the subject. 6 Press the U button to exit direct measurement mode. White balance presets can be viewed by selecting [White balance] > [Preset manual] in the photo or movie shooting menu. White frames show the positions of the targets used to measure preset white balance.
D Time Limit (Live View) Direct measurement mode will end if no operations are performed in the time selected for Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off delay] > [Live view]. D Measuring White Balance (Live View) Preset manual white balance cannot be measured when [Multiple exposure] is active or an option other than [None] is selected for [Photo live view display WB] (0 848).
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset. 1 Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then highlight [Preset manual] and press 2. 2 Select a destination. • Using the multi selector, highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-6). • Press the center of the multi selector to view the preset manual white balance menu.
3 Choose [Select image]. Highlight [Select image] and press 2 to view the pictures on the current memory card. 4 Highlight the source image. • Highlight the desired image using the multi selector. • To view the highlighted image full frame, press and hold the X button. 5 Copy white balance. • Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset. • If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset.
A Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance The selected preset can be fine-tuned by selecting [Fine-tune] in the preset manual white balance menu. A “Edit Comment” To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white-balance preset, select [Edit comment] in the preset manual white balance menu. Enter a comment as described in “Text Entry” (0 86). A “Protect” To protect the current white-balance preset, select [Protect] in the preset manual white balance menu.
Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of Photographs (Bracketing) Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.
Bracketing Bracketing is adjusted using the [Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] item in the photo shooting menu, which contains the following options: Option Description The camera varies exposure and flash level [AE & flash bracketing] over a series of photographs. The camera varies exposure over a series of [AE bracketing] photographs. The camera varies flash level over a series of [Flash bracketing] photographs.
Exposure and Flash Bracketing Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs.
1 Choose the number of shots. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. • At settings other than r, a M icon and an exposure and flash bracketing indicator will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel.
2 Select an exposure increment. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the exposure increment. • When [1/3 step] is selected for Custom Setting b2 [EV steps for exposure cntrl], the size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 EV. Bracketing programs with an increment of 2.0 or 3.0 EV offer a maximum of 5 shots. If a value of 7 or 9 was selected in Step 1, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
• The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 EV are listed below. Top control panel Exposure and flash No. of bracketing shots indicator 0 0 3 0/+0.3/+0.7 3 0/-0.7/-0.3 2 0/+0.3 2 0/-0.3 3 0/-0.3/+0.3 5 0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/+0.7 7 9 254 Bracketing order (EVs) 0/-1.0/-0.7/-0.3/+0.3/ +0.7/+1.0 0/-1.3/-1.0/-0.7/-0.3/ +0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.
3 Take pictures. • Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program. • The modified values for shutter speed and aperture are shown in the display. • Bracketing progress indicators are displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. A segment indicating the photograph taken will disappear from the indicator after each shot. No. shots: 3 Increment: 0.7 Display after first shot • Exposure changes due to bracketing are added to those made with exposure compensation.
A Bracketing Options When [AE & flash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both exposure and flash level. Select [AE bracketing] to vary only exposure, [Flash bracketing] to vary only flash level. Note that flash bracketing is available in i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) flash control modes only (0 643, 1051). A Exposure and Flash Bracketing • [Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu.
A Exposure Bracketing The settings (shutter speed and/or aperture) altered during exposure bracketing vary with the exposure mode. Mode P S A M Setting Shutter speed and aperture 1 Aperture 1 Shutter speed 1 Shutter speed 2, 3 1 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded.
❚❚ Cancelling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 312), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
White Balance Bracketing The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white balance. To use white balance bracketing: 1 Choose the number of shots. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. • At settings other than r, a W icon and a white balance bracketing indicator will appear in the top control panel and M will be displayed in the viewfinder.
2 Select a white balance increment. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the white balance increment. • The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2 (2 steps), or 3 (3 steps). • Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher “A” values correspond to increased amounts of amber. Higher “B” values correspond to increased amounts of blue.
• The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below. Top control panel White balance bracketing indicator No.
3 Take pictures. • Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a different white balance. • Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
D White Balance Bracketing Restrictions White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG. A White Balance Bracketing • [Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu. • White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber– blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display). No adjustments are made on the green–magenta axis.
❚❚ Cancelling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 312), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
ADL Bracketing The camera varies Active D-Lighting (ADL) over a series of exposures. To use ADL bracketing: 1 Choose the number of shots. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. • At settings other than r, an d icon and an ADL bracketing indicator will appear in the top control panel and M will be displayed in the viewfinder.
• The number of shots determines the bracketing sequence: Number Bracketing sequence of shots 2 [Off] V Value selected in Step 2 3 [Off] V [Low] V [Normal] 4 [Off] V [Low] V [Normal] V [High] [Off] V [Low] V [Normal] V [High] V [Extra high 1] 5 [Low] V [Normal] V [High] V [Extra high 1] V [Extra high 2] • If you selected 5 shots, you can choose from bracketing sequences of [Off] to [Extra high 1] and [Low] to [Extra high 2] by holding the BKT button and rotating the subcommand dial.
2 Choose the Active D-Lighting amount. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the Active D-Lighting setting for the second shot when the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is 2.
• The selected option is shown in the Active D-Lighting display in the top control panel.
3 Take pictures. • Take the number of pictures in the bracketing program. • While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the top control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot. No. shots: 3 Display after first shot A ADL Bracketing • [Number of shots] and [Amount] can also be selected via the [Auto bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu.
❚❚ Cancelling Bracketing To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and d is no longer displayed. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 312), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Image Processing (Picture Controls) Picture Controls Adjust image processing (Picture Control) settings according to your subject or creative intent. Option n [Auto] Q [Standard] R [Neutral] Description The camera automatically adjusts hues and tones based on the [Standard] Picture Control. • The complexions of portrait subjects will appear softer than in pictures taken with the [Standard] Picture Control.
Option S [Vivid] T [Monochrome] o [Portrait] p [Landscape] q [Flat] l01- Creative Picture l20 Control 272 Description Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors. Take monochrome photographs. Smooth complexions for natural-looking portraits. Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes. Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched.
❚❚ Choosing a Picture Control Pressing the g (h/Q) button displays the Picture Control list. Highlight an option using 4 or 2 and press J to select. • The Picture Control used for movies can be selected by pressing the g (h/Q) button during filming. A “Set Picture Control” The [Set Picture Control] item in the movie shooting menu also offers a [Same as photo settings] option that sets the Picture Control for movies to the same as that used for photographs.
Modifying Picture Controls from the Menus Picture Controls can be adapted to suit the scene or the photographer’s creative intent. Picture Controls can also be edited using the g (h/Q) button. For more information, see “The g (h/Q) Button” (0 125) in “Camera Controls”. 1 Select a Picture Control. Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list and press 2.
2 Adjust settings. • Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the subcommand dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25. • The options available vary with the Picture Control selected. • To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Midrange sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp] and press 4 or 2. • Default settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button. 3 Save changes and exit. Press J to save changes.
Custom Picture Controls Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls. Option Description Create a new custom Picture Control based on an [Save/edit] existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing custom Picture Controls. [Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls. [Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls. Copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory [Load/save] card.
2 Select [Save/edit]. Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2 to view [Choose Picture Control] options. 3 Select a Picture Control. • Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2. • To save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification, press J. [Save as] options will be displayed; proceed to Step 5. 4 Adjust settings. • The options and procedure are the same as for [Set Picture Control]. • Press J to display [Save as] options when settings are complete.
5 Select a destination. Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9). 6 Name the Picture Control. • Pressing 2 when a destination is highlighted in the previous step displays the [Rename] text-entry dialog. • The default name, created by adding a two-digit number to the name of the existing Picture Control, appears in the text display area. The two-digit number is generated automatically by the camera. • Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long.
7 Press J. • Text entry will end. • The new Picture Control will be added to the Picture Control list. A The “Original Picture Control” Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display.
A Custom Picture Control Options The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based. A Sharing Custom Picture Controls The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture Control] menu can be used to copy custom Picture Controls from the camera to a memory card. You can also delete custom Picture Controls or copy them from a memory card to the camera. (The memory card must be inserted in Slot 1.
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows (Active D-Lighting and HDR) Active D-Lighting Active D-Lighting, accessed via the [Active D-Lighting] item in the photo or movie shooting menu, is used to preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural contrast. Use for high-contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day.
❚❚ Active D-Lighting Options Option Y [Auto] 3 Z P Q R [Off] Description The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in response to shooting conditions. [Extra high 2] [Extra high 1] Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed from [Extra high 2], [Extra high 1], [High] [High], [Normal], and [Low]. [Normal] [Low] Active D-Lighting off. D Active D-Lighting • • • • • 282 “Noise” in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting.
High Dynamic Range (HDR) The [HDR (high dynamic range)] item in the photo shooting menu can be used with high-contrast subjects to preserve details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and other subjects to preserve a wide range of details, from highlights to shadows.
❚❚ HDR Options Option Description [On (series)]: Take a series of HDR photographs. To end HDR photography, select [HDR mode] again and choose [Off]. [HDR mode] • [On (single photo)]: Take a single HDR photograph. • [Off]: End HDR photography. Choose the difference in exposure between the two shots. The higher the value, the greater the dynamic [Exposure range. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will differential] automatically adjust the exposure differential to suit the scene.
❚❚ Taking HDR Photographs We recommend that you use the [Matrix metering] metering option when shooting with HDR. 1 Highlight [HDR (high dynamic range)] in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 2 Select an [HDR mode]. • Highlight [HDR mode] and press 2. • Highlight one of the following options using 1 or 3 and press J.
Option Description Take a series of HDR photographs. HDR [0 On (series)] shooting will continue until you select [Off] for [HDR mode]. Normal shooting will resume after you have [On (single photo)] taken a single HDR photograph. Proceed without taking additional HDR [Off] photographs. • If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, an y icon will be displayed in the top control panel while HDR mode is in effect.
3 Choose a value for [Exposure differential]. • Highlight [Exposure differential] and press 2. • Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J. • Choose higher values for high- contrast subjects. • Note, however, that choosing a higher value than required may not produce the desired results. Match your choice to the level of contrast in the scene. • If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically adjust the exposure differential to suit the scene.
4 Adjust [Smoothing]. • Highlight [Smoothing] and press 2. • Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J; the selected option represents the amount the boundaries between the two images are smoothed. • Higher values produce a smoother composite image. 5 Choose a setting for [Save individual images (NEF)]. • Highlight [Save individual images (NEF)] and press 2. • Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
6 Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot. • The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. • Flashing “1” and “k” indicators appear respectively in the top control panel and viewfinder while the images are combined. No additional pictures can be taken until recording is complete. • If [On (series)] is selected for [HDR mode], you can continue to take HDR photographs until [Off] is selected.
D NEF (RAW) HDR photographs taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is selected for image quality will be recorded in JPEG format. D HDR Photography • • • • • • • • 290 The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright objects or halos around dark objects. This can be mitigated using [Smoothing].
D HDR Restrictions HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including: • Bracketing • Multiple exposure • Interval-timer photography • Time-lapse movies • Focus shift A Adjusting HDR Settings When [HDR (high dynamic range)] is selected for Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] > [BKT button], [HDR mode] (Step 2) and [Exposure differential] (Step 3) can be selected using the BKT button and command dials.
Movie Recording and Editing Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop At frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 and 1280 × 720, you can choose an image area using the [Image area] > [Choose image area] option in the movie shooting menu. Select [FX] to shoot movies in what is referred to as “FX-based movie format”, [DX] to shoot in “DX-based movie format”. The differences between the two are illustrated below.
• The sizes of the areas recorded in FX- and DX-based movie formats differ. The differences are shown below. Format FX-based movie format DX-based movie format Area recorded Approx. 35.9 × 20.2 mm Approx. 23.5 × 13.2 mm • Movies shot with a DX-format lens and [On] selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop] in the movie shooting menu are recorded in DX-based movie format. • Image-area selection is not available at frame sizes of 3840 × 2160 and “1920 × 1080 crop”.
Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality The [Frame size/frame rate] item in the movie shooting menu is used to choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. You can also choose from two [Movie quality] options: [High quality] and [Normal]. Together, these options determine the maximum bit rate and recording time, as shown in the following table.
Max. bit rate Max. recording High Normal time quality Frame size/frame rate 1 u/6 v/7 8/8 9/9 !/! [1920×1080; 60p crop] 5 [1920×1080; 50p crop] 5 [1920×1080; 30p crop] 5 [1920×1080; 25p crop] 5 [1920×1080; 24p crop] 5 56 Mbps 28 Mbps 28 Mbps 14 Mbps 29 min. 59 s 4 1 The frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are respectively 59.94 fps, 50 fps, 29.97 fps, 25 fps, and 23.976 fps. 2 Movies are recorded in 4K UHD. k is displayed in the monitor. 3 Movie quality fixed at [High quality].
The Movie Crop Movies have an aspect ratio of 16:9. The crop varies with frame size. 1 3840 × 2160 2 1920 × 1080 and 1280 × 720 3 1920 × 1080 crop • Going from a frame size of 1920 × 1080 or 1280 × 720 to 3840 × 2160 increases the apparent focal length by approximately 1.5×. • Going from 1920 × 1080 or 1280 × 720 to “1920 × 1080 crop” increases the apparent focal length by approximately 3×.
Points to Note When Recording Movies Note the following points when recording movies: • Depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before the maximum length (0 294) is reached. • Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in [Face-priority AF] drops during movie recording. • A 0 icon (0 17) indicates that movies cannot be recorded. • [Spot metering] is not available during movie recording. • Flash lighting (0 641) cannot be used.
A Movie Recording: Exposure Mode • If the subject is over- or under-exposed in mode P or S, exit and restart live view or select mode A and adjust aperture. • The following exposure settings can be adjusted during filming: Mode P, S 1 A M Aperture — 4 4 Shutter speed — — 4 ISO sensitivity 2 —3 —3 4 4 1 Exposure control in mode S is the same as in mode P. 2 If [On] is selected for [Electronic VR] in the movie shooting menu when ISO sensitivity is set to a value of from Hi 0.
A Recording Movies in Mode M In mode M shutter speed can be set to values between 1/25 s and 1/8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate). A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords If [Record movies] is selected for Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Shutter-release button], the shutter-release buttons on optional wireless remote controllers and remote cords can be pressed halfway to start live view or pressed all the way down to start and end movie recording.
Editing Movies Movies can be edited using the following options: Option [Choose start/ 9 end point] [Save current 4 frame] r [Add index] o [Delete index] 300 Editing Movies Description Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed. Save a selected frame as a JPEG still. Add indices to movies during playback. Indices can be used to quickly locate frames during playback and editing (0 307). Delete indices from movies (0 307).
Trimming Movies 1 Display a movie full frame. 2 Pause the movie on the new opening frame. • Press the center of the multi selector to start playback. Press 3 to pause. • Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. • Press 4 or 2 or rotate the main command dial to locate the desired frame. 3 Select [Choose start/end point]. Press the i button, highlight [Choose start/end point], and press 2.
4 Choose the start point. To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight [Start point] and press J. 5 Confirm the new start point. • If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or rewind. • To skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial. • To skip to the first or last frame, rotate the sub-command dial.
6 Choose the end point. Press g (h/Q) to switch to the end-point selection tool (x) and then select the closing frame (x) as described in Step 5. 7 Press 1 to create the copy. 8 Preview the copy. • To preview the copy, highlight [Preview] and press J (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). • To abandon the current copy and return to Step 5, highlight [Cancel] and press J.
9 Choose a save option. Choose [Save as new file] to save the edited copy as a new file. To replace the original movie with the edited copy, choose [Overwrite existing file]. 10 Save the copy. Press J to save the copy. D Trimming Movies • The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card. • Movies less than two seconds long cannot be edited using [Choose start/end point]. • Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A Removing Opening or Closing Footage • To remove only the closing footage from a movie, choose [End point] in Step 4, select the closing frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the g (h/Q) button in Step 6. • To remove only the opening footage, proceed to Step 7 without pressing the g (h/Q) button in Step 6. A The Retouch Menu [Trim Movie] Option Movies can also be edited using the [Trim movie] item in the retouch menu.
Saving Selected Frames as JPEG Stills 1 Pause the movie on the desired frame. • Press 3 to pause playback. • Press 4 or 2 to locate the desired frame. 2 Choose [Save current frame]. Press the i button, then highlight [Save current frame] and press J to create a JPEG copy of the current frame. A [Save Current Frame] • Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu when the movie was recorded. • They cannot be retouched.
Adding Indices to Movies 1 Pause playback on the desired frame. • Press 3 to pause playback. • Press 4 or 2 to locate the desired frame. 2 Select [Add index]. • Press the i button, highlight [Add index], and press J to add an index. • Up to 20 indices can be added to each movie. A Deleting Indices After rotating the sub-command dial to skip to the desired index (either while playback is in progress or while playback is paused), press the i button to display a menu.
Other Shooting Options Using Two Memory Cards To choose the role played by the memory card in Slot 2 when two memory cards are inserted, select [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu. Option Description The card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in P [Overflow] Slot 1 is full. Each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in Q [Backup] Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2.
Option Description Two JPEG copies are recorded, one to each memory card. • The copy saved to the card in Slot 1 is recorded at the image quality and size selected via the T button or photo shooting menu. The copy saved to the card in Slot 2 is recorded at an image quality of [JPEG basic] and a size of either [JPEG Slot 1 - [Medium] or [Small]. The size can be selected by O JPEG Slot 2] pressing 2 when [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is highlighted.
A [Backup], [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], and [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] • The viewfinder and top control panel show the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of space available. • The shutter release is disabled when either card is full. A Viewing Dual-Format Photos • Use the [Dual-format recording PB slot] item in the playback menu to choose the slot from which dual-format photos are played back.
Deleting Copies When deleting pictures recorded using [Backup], [RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2], or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], you have the choice of erasing either both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot. • Pressing O (Q) when a picture created using either of these options is highlighted during playback displays a confirmation message. • To delete only the copy on the card in the current slot, highlight [Selected image] and press O (Q) again.
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by pressing the two buttons marked with green dots (S and U) at the same time and holding them for over two seconds (the control panels turn off briefly while settings are reset).
Photo Shooting Menu With the exceptions of multiple exposure, interval timer, timelapse movie, and focus shift, only settings in the current photo shooting menu bank are affected.
Option Flicker reduction Flicker reduction setting Flicker reduction indicator Auto bracketing Multiple exposure HDR (high dynamic range) Silent live view photography Default Disable On Off 1 Off 2 Off 3 Off 1 The number of shots is reset to zero. The bracketing increment for exposure, flash, and white balance bracketing is reset to 1. The amount for the second shot in two-shot ADL bracketing programs is reset to [Auto].
Movie Shooting Menu Option ISO sensitivity settings Maximum sensitivity Auto ISO control (mode M) ISO sensitivity (mode M) White balance Set Picture Control Active D-Lighting Electronic VR Headphone volume Default 102400 Off 100 Same as photo settings Same as photo settings Off Off 15 Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings 315
Other Settings Option Focus point Preset focus point Exposure mode Flexible program Exposure compensation AE lock (Hold) Aperture lock Shutter speed lock Exposure preview Autofocus mode AF-area mode (viewfinder photography) 316 Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings Default Center Center Programmed auto Off Off (0.
Option AF-area mode (live view/filming) Photo live view display WB Metering Flash mode Flash compensation FV lock Multi-selector power aperture Multi selector exposure comp. Exposure delay mode Highlight display Default Normal-area AF None Matrix metering Fill flash Off (0.0) Off Disable Disable Off * Off * Only settings in the current Custom Settings menu bank are affected.
Combining Multiple Exposures in a Single Photo (Multiple Exposure) Use the [Multiple exposure] item in the photo shooting menu to record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph. Multiple Exposure Options Option Description [On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures. To end multiple exposure photography, select [Multiple exposure mode] again and choose [Off]. • [On (single photo)]: Create one multiple exposure. • [Off]: End multiple exposure photography.
Option Description [Add]: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not adjusted. • [Average]: Gain is adjusted before the exposures are overlaid. - The gain for each exposure is equal to 1 divided by the total number of exposures taken. For example, in a photo made by combining two exposures, the gain for each exposure will be set to 1/2, while in a photo combining three exposures, gain will be set to 1/3.
Option Description [On]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up; the latter are saved in NEF (RAW) [Save individual format. images (NEF)] • [Off]: Discard the individual shots and save only the multiple exposure. • [On]: Earlier exposures are superimposed on the view through the lens during live view photography. The [Overlay earlier exposures aid composition of the next shot. shooting] • [Off]: Earlier exposures are not displayed while shooting is in progress.
Creating a Multiple Exposure 1 Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 2 Choose an option for [Multiple exposure mode]. • Highlight [Multiple exposure mode] and press 2. • Highlight a multiple exposure mode using 1 or 3 and press J. • A n icon is displayed in the top control panel when [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected.
3 Choose a value for [Number of shots] (number of exposures). • Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2. • Choose the number of exposures using 1 or 3 and press J. 4 Choose an option for [Overlay mode]. • Highlight [Overlay mode] and press 2. • Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
5 Choose a setting for [Save individual images (NEF)]. • Highlight [Save individual images (NEF)] and press 2. • Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J. • To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up, select [On]; the individual shots are saved in NEF (RAW) format. To save only the multiple exposure, select [Off]. 6 Choose an option for [Overlay shooting]. • Highlight [Overlay shooting] and press 2. • Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
7 Choose an option for [Select first exposure (NEF)]. • To choose the first exposure from existing NEF (RAW) photos, highlight [Select first exposure (NEF)] and press 2. • Use the multi selector to highlight the desired picture. • To view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X button. • To view pictures in other locations, press W (M) and choose the desired card and folder in the [Choose slot and folder] dialog. • After highlighting the desired picture, press J.
8 Start shooting. • The n icon will flash. • Take the selected number of shots. If you used [Select first exposure (NEF)] to select an existing NEF (RAW) image as the first exposure in Step 7, shooting will start from the second exposure. • The number of exposures remaining in the current multiple exposure can be displayed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway between shots. • Once you have taken the selected number of shots, the pictures will be overlaid to create a multiple exposure.
• If [On (single photo)] is selected, the camera will exit multiple exposure mode and the n icon will clear from the display once the number of shots selected in Step 3 has been taken and the multiple exposure has been recorded. • If [On (series)] is selected for [Multiple exposure mode], you can continue to take additional multiple exposures until [Off] is selected. D Multiple Exposure • Voice memos can be recorded once shooting is complete. You cannot record voice memos while shooting is in progress.
• • • • • • Multiple exposures may be affected by “noise” in the form of randomlyspaced bright pixels, fog, or lines. In CL and CH modes and during silent burst photography in mode Q, the camera will take pictures while the shutter-release button is pressed and record a multiple exposure once the selected number shots has been taken. If [On (single photo)] is selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure mode will end once a multiple exposure has been recorded.
A Adjusting Multiple Exposure Settings When [Multiple exposure] is selected for Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] > [BKT button], [Multiple exposure mode] (Step 2) and [Number of shots] (Step 3) can be selected using the BKT button and command dials. • Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose from the following multiple exposure modes: a ([Off]), 1 ([On (single photo)]), and b ([On (series)]).
Using the i Button Pictures can be viewed by pressing the K button while a multiple exposure is in progress. The most recent shot in the current multiple exposure is indicated by a n icon; pressing the i button when this icon is present displays the multiple exposure i menu. • Highlight items and press J to select. • You can also have the option of using touch controls after pressing the i button.
Ending Multiple Exposures To end a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken, select [Off] for multiple exposure mode. A multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point (if [Average] is selected for [Overlay mode], gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded).
Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting) Use the [Interval timer shooting] item in the photo shooting menu to take photographs at a selected interval until a specified number of shots has been recorded. When using the interval timer, select a release mode other than E and MUP. Interval Timer Shooting Options Option Description Start interval timer shooting.
Option [Exposure smoothing] [Silent photography] 332 Description Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match the previous shot. • Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by shortening the interval between shots. • Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if [Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
Option Description [On]: Enable interval priority to ensure that frames shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen interval. - Flash photography is disabled. - The number of shots per interval is set to 1, even if the number of shots chosen for [Intervals×shots/interval] is 2 or more. - If AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S priority [Interval priority] selection]. If AF-C is selected, select [Release] for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C priority selection].
Option [Options] 334 Description Combine interval-timer photography with other options. • [AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing during interval-timer photography. • [Time-lapse movie]: Use the photos taken during interval-timer photography to create a time-lapse movie with an aspect ratio of 16:9. - The camera saves both the photos and the timelapse movie. - Selecting [1.
Option Description Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select; selected items are marked with a check (M). To deselect (remove the check from: U) a [Starting storage selected option, highlight it and press 2 again. • [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new folder] sequence. • [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to 0001 whenever a new folder is created. D Before Shooting • Take a test shot at current settings.
Interval-Timer Photography 1 Highlight [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu and press 2. 2 Adjust interval timer settings. • Choose the start day and time. Highlight [Choose start day/ time] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - To start shooting immediately, select [Now]. - To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/time]. Choose the date and time and press J.
• Choose the interval between shots. Highlight [Interval] and press 2. Choose an interval (in hours, minutes, and seconds) and press J. • Choose the number of shots per interval. Highlight [Intervals×shots/ interval] and press 2. Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval and press J. - In release mode S (single frame), the photographs for each interval will be taken at the rate selected for Custom Setting d1 [Continuous shooting speed] > [Continuous high-speed].
• Enable or disable exposure smoothing. Highlight [Exposure smoothing] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. • Enable or disable silent photography. Highlight [Silent photography] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting.
• Choose an interval priority option. Highlight [Interval priority] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. • Choose whether the camera focuses between shots. Highlight [Focus before each shot] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J.
• Choose additional options. Highlight [Options] and press 2. Highlight [AE bracketing] or [Time-lapse movie] and press 2. - If you selected [AE bracketing], choose values for [Number of shots] and [Increment]; if you selected [Time-lapse movie], choose settings for [Frame size/ frame rate] and [Destination]. • Choose starting folder options. Highlight [Starting storage folder] and press 2. 340 Select the desired options and press J to proceed.
3 Highlight [Start] and press J. • If [Now] was selected for [Choose start day/time] in Step 2, shooting will start after three seconds. • Otherwise shooting will start at the time selected for [Choose start day/time] > [Choose day/time]. • Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken. D Interval-Timer Photography • Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected number of shots at the predicted shutter speed.
• • • • • If shooting cannot proceed at current settings—for example, if shutter speed is set to A (“Bulb”) or % (“Time”), [00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval], or the start time is in less than a minute—a warning will be displayed in the monitor. If [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], the standby timer will not expire during interval-timer photography, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer].
D Interval-Timer Photography: Restrictions Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including: • Live view • Movie recording • Long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”) • The self-timer • Bracketing • Multiple exposure • HDR (high dynamic range) • Focus shift D When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography] Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features, including: • ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.
A During Shooting During interval-timer photography, the Q icon will flash in the top control panel. Immediately before the next shooting interval begins, the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining, and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. • Between shots, the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
Pausing Interval-Timer Photography Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by pressing J or by selecting [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. • If [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], pressing J between intervals will end interval-timer photography.
Resuming Interval Timer Shooting Shooting can be resumed using the [Interval timer shooting] item in the photo shooting menu. The procedure is as follows: To resume shooting immediately: Highlight [Restart] and press J. To resume shooting at a specified time: Select [Choose start day/time], highlight [Choose day/time] and press 2. 346 Choose a starting date and time and press J. Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting) Highlight [Restart] and press J.
Ending Interval Timer Shooting To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are taken, select [Interval timer shooting], highlight [Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In this case you will need to press J to pause intervaltimer photography and then select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J.
Creating a Movie from Photos (TimeLapse Movie) Use the [Time-lapse movie] item in the photo shooting menu to create silent time-lapse movies from photos taken automatically at a selected interval. Time-Lapse Movie Options Option Description Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about [Start] 3 s and continues at the interval selected for [Interval] for the time selected for [Shooting time]. Choose the interval between shots, in minutes and [Interval] seconds.
Option Description [Silent Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the photography] vibrations it produces during shooting. • [Choose image area]: Choose the image area for time-lapse movies from [FX] and [DX]. [Image area] • [Auto DX crop]: If [On] is selected, the camera will automatically choose the [DX] crop when a DX lens is attached. [Frame size/ Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie.
Recording Time-Lapse Movies D Before Shooting • • • • • • Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop. Check the composition before shooting. Take test shots and check the results in the monitor. Before proceeding, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date. We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction (VR).
2 Adjust time-lapse movie settings. • Choose the interval between shots. Highlight [Interval] and press 2. Choose an interval (in minutes and seconds) and press J. - Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed. • Choose the total shooting time. Highlight [Shooting time] and press 2. Choose a shooting time (in hours and minutes) and press J. - The maximum shooting time is 7 hours and 59 minutes.
• Enable or disable exposure smoothing. Highlight [Exposure smoothing] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure. • Enable or disable silent photography. Highlight [Silent photography] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting.
• Choose the image area. Highlight [Image area] and press 2. Highlight [Choose image area] or [Auto DX crop] and press 2. - Highlight the desired option ([FX] or [DX] in the case of [Choose image area], [On] or [Off] in the case of [Auto DX crop]) and press J. • Choose the frame size and rate. Highlight [Frame size/frame rate] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J.
• Choose an interval priority option. Highlight [Interval priority] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. • Choose whether the camera focuses between shots. Highlight [Focus before each shot] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - If [On] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will focus before each shot according to the option currently selected for autofocus mode.
• Choose a destination. Highlight [Destination] and press 2. Highlight the slot that will be used to record time-lapse movies when two memory cards are inserted and press J. 3 Highlight [Start] and press J. • Shooting starts after about 3 s. • The camera takes pictures at interval selected for [Interval] for the time selected for [Shooting time] in Step 2.
❚❚ Ending Shooting To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J or select [Time-lapse movie] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. • A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where shooting ended and normal photography will resume.
D Image Review The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress. The current frame will however be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu. Note that other playback operations cannot be performed while the frame is displayed. The current frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short. D Time-Lapse Movies • • • • • • Sound is not recorded with time-lapse movies.
• Shooting may end if camera controls are used, settings are changed, or an HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where shooting ended. • The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a movie being recorded: - Disconnecting the power source - Ejecting the memory card D During Shooting • During shooting, Q and the time-lapse recording indicator will be displayed in the top control panel.
D Time-Lapse Movies: Restrictions Time-lapse movie recording cannot be combined with some camera features, including: • Live view photography • Movie recording • Long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”) • The self-timer • Bracketing • Multiple exposure • HDR (high dynamic range) • Interval-timer photography • Focus shift D When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography] Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features, including: • ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.
Varying Focus over a Series of Photos (Focus Shift Shooting) The [Focus shift shooting] item in the photo shooting menu varies focus automatically over a series of photographs. Use it to take pictures that will later be combined via focus stacking. The photos can be copied to a computer and combined using thirdparty software. Focus Shift Shooting Options Option [Start] [No. of shots] [Focus step width] 360 Description Start shooting.
Option [Interval until next shot] [First-frame exposure lock] [Silent photography] [Starting storage folder] Description The time between shots, in seconds. • Select [00] to take photos at up to about 3 fps. • To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge. • [On]: The camera locks exposure for all shots at the setting for the first frame. • [Off]: The camera adjusts exposure before each shot.
D Before Shooting • • • • • • • • • 362 Use an AF-S or AF-P lens. Choose a release mode other than E. For best results, we recommend that you choose mode A or M so that aperture does not change during shooting. We recommend that you stop aperture down two or three stops from the maximum. We recommend that you take all shots at the same ISO sensitivity. Take a test shot at current settings. We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction (VR).
Focus Shift Photography 1 Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF. Focus shift is not available with manual focus lenses. 2 Focus. • During focus shift, the camera takes a series of shots starting from a selected focus position and continuing toward infinity. The starting focus position should be slightly in front of the closest point on the subject. • Do not move the camera after focusing. 3 Highlight [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
4 Adjust focus shift settings. • Choose the number of shots. Highlight [No. of shots] and press 2. Choose the number of shots and press J. - The maximum number of shots is 300. - We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll need. You can winnow them down during focus stacking. - More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects or other small objects. On the other hand, only a few may be needed to photograph a landscape from front to back with a wide-angle lens.
• Choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot. Highlight [Focus step width] and press 2. Choose a focus step width and press J. - Press 4 to reduce the focus step width, 2 to increase. - Note that high settings increase the risk that some areas will be out of focus when the shots are stacked. A value of 5 or less is recommended. - Try experimenting with different settings before shooting.
• Choose the interval between shots. Highlight [Interval until next shot] and press 2. Choose the interval between shots (in seconds) and press J. - Choose the interval between shots, in seconds. - Select [00] to take photos at up to approximately 3 fps. - To ensure correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge. A setting of [00] is recommended when shooting without a flash.
• Enable or disable first-frame exposure lock. Highlight [First-frame exposure lock] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - [Off] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will not change during shooting, [On] when photographing landscapes and the like under variable lighting. - Selecting [On] locks exposure at the value for the first shot, ensuring that all photos have the same exposure.
• Enable or disable silent photography. Highlight [Silent photography] and press 2. Highlight an option and press J. - If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting.
• Choose starting folder options. Highlight [Starting storage folder] and press 2. Select the desired options and press J to proceed. - Highlight an option and press 2 to select; selected items are marked with a check (M). To deselect (remove the check from: U) a selected option, highlight it and press 2 again. - Place a check (M) next to [New folder] to create a new folder for each new sequence.
5 Highlight [Start] and press J. • Shooting starts after about 3 s. • The camera takes photographs at the selected interval, starting at the focus distance selected at the start of shooting and progressing out toward infinity by the selected focus step distance with each shot. • Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been taken or focus reaches infinity.
D Focus Shift Photography • • • • • The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image may vary from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while shooting is in progress. If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for the flash to charge.
A Close-ups Because focus depth is reduced at short focus distances, we recommend choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of shots when photographing subjects close to the camera. A During Shooting During focus shift photography, the Q icon will flash in the top control panel. Immediately before each shot, the AF indicator will flash and the shutter speed display will show the number of shots remaining.
A Focus Shift Photography: Restrictions • Focus shift shooting will not start if: - The camera clock is not set - An incompatible lens is attached (use only AF-S or AF-P lenses) - No memory card is inserted • Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including: - Live view - Movie recording - Long time-exposures (“Bulb” or “Time”) - The self-timer - Bracketing - Multiple exposure - HDR (high dynamic range) - Interval-timer photography - Time-lapse movies A When [On] Is Selected
The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography) To enable the electronic shutter during live view photography, muting the shutter and eliminating the vibrations it produces, select [On] for [Silent live view photography] in the photo shooting menu. Use for landscapes, still lifes, and other static subjects. • Use of a tripod is recommended. • Enabling silent live view photography changes the frame advance rates for continuous release modes (0 205).
A Silent Live View Photography • Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] does not completely silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment. • During silent live view photography, you may notice the following in the display and in photographs recorded with the camera.
A Silent Photography Some camera features, including the following, cannot be combined with silent live view photography: • ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.
Customizing the i Menus: Customize i Menu Choose the items displayed in the i menus during shooting. Use Custom Setting f1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items displayed during viewfinder photography, Custom Setting f2 [Customize i menu (Lv)] to choose the items displayed during live view photography, and Custom Setting g1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items displayed during movie recording. The procedure for customizing the i menus is described below.
2 Highlight the desired item and press J. • The item will be assigned to the selected position and the options shown in Step 1 will be displayed. • Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as desired. 3 Press the G button. Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be displayed.
Using Non-CPU Lenses (Non-CPU Lens Data) Non-CPU lenses (0 1045) can be used in exposure modes A and M. Aperture is set using the lens aperture ring. Entering lens data using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu grants access to the following CPU lens functions. • Entering the focal length: - allows use of power zoom with optional flash units and - allows lens focal length to be listed, with an asterisk (“*”), in the playback photo info display.
• Entering both the focal length and the maximum aperture allows use of: - color matrix metering (Note that color matrix metering may not produce the desired results with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses. In these cases [Center-weighted metering] or [Spot metering] can be used instead.
Entering Lens Data 1 Highlight [Non-CPU lens data] in the setup menu and press 2. 2 Highlight [Lens number]. Press 4 or 2 to choose a lens number. 3 Highlight [Focal length (mm)]. Press 4 or 2 to enter the lens focal length.
4 Highlight [Maximum aperture]. Press 4 or 2 to enter the maximum aperture. 5 Press J to save changes. Lens information will be saved and the camera will exit to the setup menu.
Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data 1 Assign [Choose non-CPU lens number] to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls]. 2 Hold the control to which [Choose non-CPU lens number] has been assigned and rotate a command dial. The selected lens number is displayed in the top control panel. Rotate the dial until the desired lens number is displayed. 1 Focal length 2 Maximum aperture 3 Lens number A Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.
Location Data The built-in location data unit records the camera’s current latitude, longitude, and altitude, together with the current time (Coordinated Universal Time, or UTC). Location data embedded in pictures can be viewed in the location data page of the playback photo info display (0 414). Location Data Options To enable or disable the location data function or adjust location data settings, highlight [Location data (built-in)] in the setup menu and press 2.
Option [Create log] [Log list] [Position] Description Record a track log. • [Log location data]: The camera will log location data at the interval chosen using [Log interval] for the time selected for [Log length]. To end, pause, or resume the log, highlight [Log location data] and press 2. • [Log interval]: Choose how often the camera logs its current location. • [Log length]: Choose how long logging will continue. List track logs by date.
❚❚ The Satellite Signal Indicator Signal strength is shown by a o icon in the top control panel. • o (static): The camera records the current latitude, longitude, and altitude. • o (flashing): The camera is unable to determine its location from the satellite signal; location data are not recorded. Wait for the o icon to stop flashing. • o not displayed: The o icon clears from the display if no signal is received for two seconds.
A Location Data • The camera may in certain cases need additional time to acquire location data, for example immediately after the battery is inserted, when the location data function is enabled for the first time, or after an extended period of disuse. • The positions of navigation satellites change constantly. This may slow or prevent the acquisition of location data in some locations or at certain hours of the day.
• The location reported by the camera may differ from its actual location by up to several hundred meters. • The location data recorded with movies are those reported at the start of recording. • The location data embedded in pictures may differ from the location in which they were actually recorded. • Turning the camera off does not disable the location data function. The location data function can be disabled by selecting [Off] for [Location data (built-in)] > [Record location data] in the setup menu.
A Track Logs • The time remaining appears in the [Location data (built-in)] display while logging is in progress. • Logs are not interrupted when the camera is turned off or the standby timer expires. Be sure to monitor the battery level while logging is in progress. • Logs are stored in the “NIKON” > “GNSS” folder on the memory card and have names of the form “Nyymmddx.log”.
Playback Viewing Pictures Full-Frame Playback Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame. • Additional pictures can be viewed using the multi selector: press 2 to view pictures in the order recorded, 4 to view pictures in reverse order. • To view more information on the current picture, press 1 or 3 (0 405).
Thumbnail Playback To view multiple pictures, press the W (M) button when a picture is displayed full frame. • The number of pictures displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time the W (M) button is pressed, and decreases with each press of the X button. • Highlight pictures using 1, 3, 4, or 2.
Playback Controls 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 O (Q): Delete the current picture (0 429). 2 G: View the menus (0 80). 3 g (h/Q): Protect the current picture (0 421). 4 X: Zoom in (0 419). 5 W (M): View multiple pictures (0 391).
❚❚ The J Button and Multi Selector The following operations can be performed by holding J and pressing the multi selector as indicated. Option J+ Description Display [Choose slot and folder] options. Highlight a slot and press 2 to display a list of the folders on the memory card in the selected slot. You can then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures it contains. J+ If the current picture is a photograph, retouch options will be displayed.
D Touch Controls Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor (0 18). D Rotate Tall To display “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select [On] for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu. A Two Memory Cards If two memory cards are inserted, [Choose slot and folder] options can also be viewed by pressing the W (M) button when 72 thumbnails are displayed.
Playback Touch Controls During playback, the touch-sensitive monitor can be used for the operations below. ❚❚ Viewing Other Pictures Flick left or right to view other pictures. ❚❚ Scrolling Rapidly to Other Pictures Touching the bottom of the screen in full-frame view displays a frame advance bar. Slide your finger left or right along the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
❚❚ Zoom (Photos Only) Double-tap or use stretch gestures to initiate zoom during full-frame playback (0 418). • Stretch again to zoom in further. • Pinch to zoom out. • Glide to scroll. • Double-tap to cancel zoom. ❚❚ Viewing Thumbnails Use a pinch gesture to “zoom out” from full-frame playback to a thumbnail view (0 391). • Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of images displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
❚❚ Viewing Movies Tap the on-screen guide to start movie playback (movies are indicated by a 1 icon). • Tap the display to pause. Tap again to resume. • To exit to full-frame playback, tap Z. • Note that some of the icons in the movie playback display do not respond to touch-screen operations.
A Vertical Flick Gestures To choose the operations performed by flicking up or down during full-frame playback, use Custom Setting f12 [Full-frame playback flicks]. • Choose from the following options. - [Rating]: Assign the current picture a previously-selected rating. - [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)]: Select the current picture for upload to a computer or ftp server via Ethernet or wireless transmitter. - [Protect]: Protect the current picture.
The i Button Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail playback displays the i menu for playback mode. Highlight items and press J or 2 to select. Press the i button again to return to playback.
❚❚ Photos Option [Quick crop] 1 [Rating] [Select to send to smart device] [Select to send to computer] [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] [Filtered playback] [Filtered playback criteria] [Record voice memo] [Play voice memo] [Retouch] 400 Viewing Pictures Description Save a copy of the current image cropped to the area visible in the display. This option is not available when RGB histograms are displayed (0 408). Rate the current picture (0 423). Select the current picture for upload.
Option Description If the current picture is one of a pair created with [Backup], [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], or [JPEG Slot [Jump to copy on 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card other card] in Slot 2], choosing this option displays the copy on the card in the other slot. Choose a slot and folder for playback. Highlight a slot and press 2 to display a list of the folders on [Choose slot and the memory card in the selected slot.
A Side-by-Side Comparison Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with the unretouched originals. 1 2 • • • • • • • • • 402 3 1 Options used to create copy 2 Source image 3 Retouched copy The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the right. The options used to create the copy are listed at the top of the display. Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched copy.
❚❚ Movies Option [Rating] [Select to send to computer] [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] [Filtered playback] [Filtered playback criteria] [Volume control] Description Rate the current picture (0 423). Select the current picture for upload. The option displayed varies with the type of device connected. View only pictures that match selected criteria (0 427). Choose filter criteria. Adjust playback volume. Trim footage from the current movie and save the [Trim movie] edited copy in a new file (0 300).
❚❚ Movies (Playback Paused) Option [Choose start/end 9 point] Description Trim footage from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file (0 300). Save a selected frame as a JPEG still 4 [Save current frame] (0 306). Add indices to movies during playback. Indices can be used to quickly locate r [Add index] frames during playback and editing (0 307). Delete indices (0 307).
Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. 1 2 3 4 File information Exposure data * Highlights * RGB histogram * 5 Shooting data * 6 Overview data * 7 None (image only) * * Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
File Information 1 23 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 16 15 9 10 14 13 12 11 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Voice memo indicator (0 436) Protect status (0 421) Retouch indicator (0 958) Upload marking (0 425) IPTC preset indicator (0 400, 914) Focus point 1 (0 164) AF-area brackets 2 (0 164) Frame number/total number of frames File name (0 760) Image quality (0 118, 144) Image size (0 120, 145) Image area (0 136) Time of recording (0 43) Date of recording (0 43) Current card slot (0 38) Rating (0 423) Folde
Exposure Data 1 2 3 4 5 1 Folder number–frame number (0 755) 2 Exposure mode (0 108, 182) 3 Shutter speed (0 185, 188) 4 Aperture (0 186, 188) 5 Exposure compensation (0 117, 199) 6 ISO sensitivity * (0 114, 213) 6 * Displayed in red if the picture was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control enabled. Highlights To choose a color channel for the highlight display, choose [Select R, G, B] in the i menu and press 4 or 2.
RGB Histogram To choose a color channel for the highlight display, choose [Select R, G, B] in the i menu and press 4 or 2. 1 2 3 4 5 1 White balance (0 121, 221) Color temperature (0 231) Preset manual (0 234) 2 3 4 5 White balance fine-tuning (0 227) Histogram (RGB channel) Histogram (red channel) Histogram (green channel) Histogram (blue channel) D Playback Zoom To zoom in on the picture in the histogram display, press X.
D Histograms Histograms show tone distribution. Pixel brightness (tone) is plotted on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis. • If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively even. • If the image is dark, the distribution will be shifted to the left. • If the image is bright, the distribution will be shifted to the right.
Shooting Data View the settings in effect at the time the picture was taken. The shooting data list has multiple pages, which can be viewed by pressing 1 or 3. The information displayed can be selected using [Playback display options] > [Detailed shooting data] in the playback menu.
1 Displayed in red if the picture was taken in mode P, S, or A with auto ISO sensitivity control enabled. 2 Displayed if Custom Setting b7 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method. 3 Also includes the magnification for pictures taken with a teleconverter. 4 Displayed only if the picture was shot with a VR lens. 5 Also includes the color temperature for pictures taken using [Auto] or [Natural light auto].
❚❚ Flash Data Flash data are displayed only for pictures taken with optional flash units. Flash type Remote flash control Flash mode (0 131, 648) Flash control mode (0 645) Flash compensation (0 133, 653) Flash level * * In the case of pictures taken using TTL flash control (0 645), the flash level selected by the flash unit is displayed using the equivalent manual flash output value.
❚❚ Other Shooting Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 High ISO noise reduction (0 768) 2 3 4 5 6 Long exposure noise reduction (0 767) Active D-Lighting (0 281) HDR exposure differential (0 283) HDR smoothing (0 283) Vignette control (0 769) Retouch history (0 958). Changes are listed in the order applied. Image comment (0 911) ❚❚ Copyright Info Copyright information is only displayed if recorded using the [Copyright information] item in the setup menu at the time the picture was taken.
❚❚ Location Data Location data are displayed only if embedded in the picture at the time it was taken.
❚❚ IPTC Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Caption Event ID Headline Object Name City State Country Category Supp. Cat.
Overview 1 2 345 6 7 8 9 10 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 Voice memo indicator (0 436) 2 Frame number/total number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 416 of frames Upload marking (0 425) Protect status (0 421) Retouch indicator (0 958) Camera name Location data indicator (0 384) Image comment indicator (0 911) IPTC preset indicator (0 400, 914) Photo Information 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Histogram (0 409) Image quality (0 118, 144) Image size (0 120, 145) Image area (0 136) File name (0 760) Time of recording (0 43) F
1 2 3 4 5 13 12 11 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Metering (0 111, 178) Exposure mode (0 108, 182) Shutter speed (0 185, 188) Aperture (0 186, 188) ISO sensitivity 1 (0 114, 213) Focal length Picture Control (0 125, 271) Active D-Lighting (0 281) Color space (0 765) 6 9 8 7 10 Flash mode 2 (0 131, 648) 11 Flash compensation 2 (0 133, 653) Commander mode 2 12 White balance (0 121, 221) Color temperature (0 231) Preset manual (0 234) White balance fine-tuning (0 227) 13 Exposure compensation (0 117, 199) 1 Displ
Playback Zoom To zoom in on a photo displayed in fullframe playback, press the X button or the center of the multi selector or give the display two quick taps. [FX (36×24)]format photos can be zoomed in to maximum of approximately 21× (Large pictures), 16× (Medium), or 10× (Small). Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders; rotate the sub-command dial to view other faces.
Using Playback Zoom Operation Description • Press the X button or use stretch gestures to zoom Zoom in or out in. • To zoom out, press W (M) or use pinch gestures. A navigation window is displayed when the zoom ratio is altered, with the area currently visible indicated by a yellow border. A bar below the navigation window shows the zoom ratio, turning green at 1:1. The navigation window clears from the display after a few seconds.
Operation Crop picture * Select faces View other pictures Protect pictures Resume shooting View menus Description To crop the picture to the area currently visible in the monitor, press i and select [Quick crop]. Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in the navigation window. Rotate the sub-command dial or tap the on-screen guide to view other faces. Rotate the main command dial to view the same location in other photos without changing the zoom ratio (selecting a movie cancels zoom).
Protecting Pictures from Deletion Pictures can be protected to prevent their being deleted accidentally. Protected pictures will however be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 887). 1 Select a picture. • Display the picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom. • Alternatively, you can highlight the picture in the thumbnail list using the multi selector. 2 Press the g (h/Q) button.
• Protected pictures are marked with a P icon. • To remove protection, display the picture or highlight it in the thumbnail list and press g (h/Q) again. A Voice Memos Protecting photos also protects any voice memos recorded with the pictures. Voice memos cannot be protected separately.
Rating Pictures 1 Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press the i button. 2 Highlight [Rating] and press 2. 3 Choose a rating. Rotate the main command dial to choose the desired rating and then press J. Choose from ratings of from zero to five stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
A Ratings Ratings can also be viewed in NX Studio. Protected pictures cannot be rated. A Rating Pictures Using Camera Controls If [Rating] is assigned to [Fn button for vertical shooting] or [Fn3 button] using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls], pictures can be rated by holding the selected control and rotating the main command dial.
Selecting Pictures for Upload Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a smart device, computer, or ftp server. • The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with the type of device connected: - [Select to send to smart device]: Displayed when the camera is connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth using [Connect to smart device] in the setup menu (0 929).
1 Select the desired picture and press the i button. 2 Highlight [Select to send to smart device], [Select to send to computer], or [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] and press J. Pictures destined for a smart device are marked with a W icon, while those destined for a computer or ftp server are marked with u. D Removing Upload Marking To remove upload marking, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
Filtered Playback Select [Filtered playback] in the i menu to view only pictures that meet the criteria chosen for [Filtered playback criteria] in the playback menu or playback i menu. [Filtered Playback Criteria] Highlight options and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). During filtered playback, only pictures that meet all criteria marked with a check (M) will be displayed.
Option [Protect] [Rating] [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] Description M: Include protected pictures. M: Include pictures with selected ratings. • Select (M) [Sent images] to include pictures previously uploaded to a computer or ftp server via Ethernet or an optional WT-6 wireless transmitter. • Select (M) [Unsent images] to include pictures that have yet to be uploaded. • Select both options to include both sent and unsent pictures. • During filtered playback, a white border appears around the display.
Deleting Pictures Follow the steps below to delete pictures from memory cards. Note that pictures cannot be recovered once deleted. Pictures that are protected or hidden, however, cannot be deleted. Using the Delete Button Press the O (Q) button to delete the current picture. 1 Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press the O (Q) button. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed. • To exit without deleting the picture, press K. 2 Press the O (Q) button again.
A Deleting Copies If the picture selected for playback when the O (Q) button is pressed was recorded with two memory cards inserted and an option other than [Overflow] selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu, you will be given the option of deleting both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot (0 311).
Deleting Multiple Pictures Use [Delete] in the playback menu to delete multiple pictures at once. Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion. Option [Selected Q images] [Candidates d for deletion] [Images shot i on selected dates] Description Delete pictures rated d (candidate for deletion). R [All images] Delete all pictures from a selected memory card. Only pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu are affected.
❚❚ Deleting Selected Pictures 1 Select pictures. • Highlight pictures using the multi selector and press the center to select; selected pictures are marked with O icons. Selected pictures can be deselected by pressing the center of the multi selector again. • Repeat until all the desired pictures are selected. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. 2 Delete the pictures. • Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
❚❚ Candidates for Deletion 1 Select pictures. • The camera will list all pictures rated d (candidate for deletion). Pictures you do not currently wish to delete can be deselected by highlighting them and pressing the center of the multi selector. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. 2 Delete the pictures. • Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. • Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete the selected pictures.
❚❚ Images Shot on Selected Dates 1 Select dates. • Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select; selected dates are marked with M icons. Selected dates can be deselected by pressing 2 again. • Repeat until you have selected all the desired dates. 2 Delete the pictures. • Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. • Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete all the pictures taken on the selected dates.
❚❚ Deleting All Pictures 1 Choose a memory card. Press 1 or 3 to highlight the slot containing the memory card from which the pictures will be deleted and press J. 2 Delete the pictures. • Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu. • Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
Voice Memos Recording Voice Memos Voice memos up to 60 seconds long can be added to photographs. During Playback To add voice memos to selected pictures during playback: 1 Select the photograph. Only one voice memo can be recorded per picture; additional voice memos cannot be recorded for pictures already marked with a h icon. The existing voice memo must be deleted before another can be recorded (0 444).
2 Hold the Fn3 (C) button. • Recording starts when the button is pressed and ends when it is released. • A C icon is displayed while recording is in progress. 3 Release the Fn3 (C) button. Recording will end. A During Recording During recording, a flashing C icon and a countdown timer showing the recording time remaining will be displayed in the rear control panel. A The i Menu Recording can also be initiated by highlighting [Record voice memo] in the playback i menu and pressing J.
During Shooting A voice memo can be recorded with the most recent photograph during shooting. Recording can be initiated automatically or manually. ❚❚ Automatic Recording If [On (Auto and manual)] is selected for [Voice memo options] > [Voice memo] in the setup menu, recording will begin automatically when you lift your finger from the shutter-release button after shooting. • The recording time can be selected using [On (Auto and manual)].
D Image Review Automatic recording is not available when [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu.
❚❚ Manual Recording Voice memos can be manually added to the most recent photograph. • Before proceeding, select [Manual only] for [Voice memo options] > [Voice memo] in the setup menu. • To record a voice memo, hold the Fn3 (C) button; recording will continue while the button is pressed. A Voice Memo An icon is displayed in the rear control panel when [On (Auto and manual)] or [Manual only] is selected for [Voice memo].
A After Recording If a voice memo has been recorded for the most recent photograph, a C icon will be displayed in the rear control panel. During playback, the presence of a voice memo is indicated by a h icon. A Interrupting Recording Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls may end recording. During interval-timer photography, recording ends about two seconds before the next shot is taken; recording also ends when the camera is turned off.
A Voice Memo File Names Voice memo file names have the form “DSC_nnnn.WAV”. The voice memo has the same file number (“nnnn”) as the picture with which it is associated. For example, the voice memo for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name “DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer. • Voice memos for photos recorded with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] in the photo shooting menu have names of the form “_DSCnnnn.WAV”.
Playing Voice Memos To play voice memos, press the Fn3 (C) button when viewing photographs marked with h icons. A The i Menu Voice memos can also be played by highlighting [Play voice memo] in the playback i menu and pressing J. A Interrupting Playback Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls may end playback. Playback ends automatically when another image is selected or the camera is turned off.
Deleting Voice Memos To delete the voice memo from the current photo, press the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed as shown. • To delete both the photo and the voice memo, highlight [Image and voice memo] and press O (Q). • To delete only the voice memo, highlight [Voice memo only] and press O (Q). • To exit without deleting either the photo or the voice memo, press K.
Connecting to Computers and TVs Connecting to Computers Establish a connection to a computer to upload pictures from the camera. The camera can be connected via Wi-Fi or using a USB cable. Connecting via USB Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable. You can then use NX Studio software to copy pictures to the computer for viewing and editing.
❚❚ Installing NX Studio You will need an Internet connection when installing NX Studio. Visit the Nikon website for the latest information, including system requirements. • Download the latest NX Studio installer from the website below and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ • Note that you may be unable to download pictures from the camera using earlier versions of NX Studio.
❚❚ Copying Pictures to a Computer Using NX Studio See online help for detailed instructions. 1 Connect the camera to the computer. After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown. A Using a Card Reader Pictures can also be copied from a memory card inserted in a thirdparty card reader. You should however check that the card is compatible with the card reader. 2 Turn the camera on. • The Nikon Transfer 2 component of NX Studio will start.
3 Click [Start Transfer]. Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer. 4 Turn the camera off. Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete.
D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the camera is connected. Click the dialog and then click [Nikon Transfer 2] to select Nikon Transfer 2. D macOS If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with macOS) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is detected.
D Cautions: Connecting to Computers • Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. • Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable. • Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting a cable. • To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged.
Ethernet and Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi) For more information, see “Built-in Wireless” (0 457) and “Ethernet/WT-6” (0 514). ❚❚ Built-in Wi-Fi Connect using the [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] item in the camera setup menu. You can connect either directly or via a wireless router.
❚❚ The WT-6 Wireless Transmitter With an optional WT-6 wireless transmitter, the camera can connect to computers or ftp servers using the [Wired LAN/WT] item in the setup menu. Use Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately) to control the camera and save pictures to the computer. The connection is more reliable than that offered by the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi. ❚❚ Ethernet Connections With a third-party Ethernet cable, the camera can connect to computers or ftp servers using [Wired LAN/WT].
Connecting to HDMI Devices The camera can be connected to TVs, recorders, and other devices featuring HDMI connectors. Use the optional HDMI cable (0 1060) or a third-party type C HDMI cable. These items must be purchased separately. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable. 1 2 1 HDMI connector for connection to camera 2 HDMI connector for connection to external device * * Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the HDMI device.
TVs • After tuning the TV to the HDMI input channel, turn the camera on and press the K button to view pictures on the television screen. • Audio playback volume can be adjusted using the controls on the TV. Camera controls cannot be used. • If the camera is paired with a smart device running the SnapBridge app, the device can be used to control playback remotely while the camera is connected to a TV. See the SnapBridge app online help for details.
❚❚ Advanced Adjust settings for connection to the HDMI device. Option Description The RGB video signal input range varies with the HDMI device. [Auto], which matches the output range to the HDMI device, is recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from the following options: [Output range] • [Limited range]: For devices with an RGB video signal input range of 16 to 235.
Option [External recording control] 456 Description Choosing [On] allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol. • External recording control is available with Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor recorders. For more information on device features and operation, contact the manufacturer or refer to the documentation provided with the recorder.
Built-in Wireless Camera and Network System Chart This section is chiefly devoted to describing how to connect to a wireless local area network (LAN) using the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi or Bluetooth and how to use network features once connected. FTP FTP • For information on connecting to Ethernet networks or connecting using an optional WT-6 wireless transmitter, see “Ethernet/WT-6” (0 514).
Connecting to Smart Devices The SnapBridge App Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera and your smartphone or tablet (“smart device”). • The SnapBridge app is available from the Apple App Store® and on Google Play™. • Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.
What SnapBridge Can Do for You The tasks that can be performed using the SnapBridge app are outlined below. For details, see the SnapBridge app online help: https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html ❚❚ Downloading Pictures from the Camera Download existing pictures to your smart device. You also have the option of downloading pictures automatically as they are taken. ❚❚ Remote Photography Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device.
Wireless Connections Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera and your smart device. You can connect via either Wi-Fi (0 461) or Bluetooth (0 469). Connecting using the SnapBridge app allows you to set the camera clock and update location data using information provided by the smart device. Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures to be uploaded automatically as they are taken.
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode) D Before Connecting • Enable Wi-Fi on the smart device. For details, see the documentation provided with the device. • Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly. • Check that there is space available on the camera memory card. 1 Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app. If this is the first time you have launched the app, tap [Skip].
2 Open the tab and tap > [Wi-Fi mode]. 3 Smart device: Tap [Wi-Fi connection] when prompted.
4 Camera/smart device: Turn the camera on when prompted to do so by the smart device. Do not tap [Next] until you have completed the next step. 5 Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the setup menu, then highlight [Establish Wi-Fi connection] and press J. The camera SSID and password will be displayed.
6 Smart device: Return to the smart device and tap [Next].
7 Smart device: After reading the instructions displayed by the smart device, tap [Open the device settings app]. • Android devices: Wi-Fi settings will be displayed. • iOS devices: The “Settings” app will launch. Tap [< Settings] to open [Settings], then scroll up and tap [Wi-Fi], which you’ll find near the top of the settings list.
8 Smart device: Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera in Step 5. • The prompt displayed by the device varies with model and operating system.
- iOS device • You will not be required to enter the password when next you connect to the camera.
9 Smart device: Return to the SnapBridge app. • Once a Wi-Fi connection is established, Wi-Fi mode options will be displayed. • See online help for information on using the SnapBridge app. D Terminating Wi-Fi Mode To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap . When the icon changes to , tap and select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].
Connecting via Bluetooth Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need to pair the camera and smart device as described below. The procedure for iOS differs slightly from that for Android devices. D Before Pairing • Enable Bluetooth on the smart device. For details, see the documentation provided with the device. • Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
❚❚ Connecting to an Android Device for the First Time: Pairing For information on connecting to iOS devices, see “Connecting to an iOS Device for the First Time: Pairing” (0 476). 1 Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the setup menu, then highlight [Start pairing] and press J. The camera name will be displayed in the monitor.
2 Android device: Launch the SnapBridge app. • If this is the first time you have launched the app, tap [Connect to camera]. • If you have launched the app before, open the tab and tap [Connect to camera].
3 Android device: Tap the camera name. 4 Camera/Android device: Confirm that the camera and Android device display the same authentication code. The authentication code is shown circled in the illustrations.
5 Camera/Android device: Initiate pairing. • Camera: Press J. • Android device: Tap the button indicated in the illustration. The button in the illustration is labeled [PAIR], but the label may differ depending on the type of device and version of Android you are using. D Pairing Error If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the Android device, the device will display an error message and pairing will fail. Tap [OK] and return to Step 2.
6 Camera/Android device: Follow the on-screen instructions to complete pairing. • Camera: The camera will display the message shown in the illustration when pairing is complete. • Android device: Pairing is complete. Tap [OK] to exit to the 474 tab.
D Pairing for the First Time • The first time you pair the Android device with a camera after installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. • This prompt will not be displayed a second time. Auto link settings can however be accessed at any time using [Auto link] in the tab.
❚❚ Connecting to an iOS Device for the First Time: Pairing For information on connecting to Android devices, see “Connecting to an Android Device for the First Time: Pairing” (0 470). 1 Camera: Select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the setup menu, then highlight [Start pairing] and press J. The camera name will be displayed in the monitor.
2 iOS device: Launch the SnapBridge app. • If this is the first time you have launched the app, tap [Connect to camera]. • If you have launched the app before, open the tab and tap [Connect to camera].
3 iOS device: Tap the camera name. 4 iOS device: Read the pairing instructions. Pairing instructions will be displayed. Read the instructions carefully and tap [Understood].
5 iOS device: Tap the camera name again. The iOS device prompt you to select an accessory. Tap the camera name again.
6 Camera/iOS device: Initiate pairing. • Camera: Press J. • iOS device: Tap the button indicated in the illustration. The button in the illustration is labeled [Pair], but the label may differ depending on the version of iOS you are using.
D Pairing Error If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the iOS device, the device will display an error message and pairing will fail. Dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not running in the background, then open the iOS “Settings” app and request iOS to “forget” the camera before returning to Step 1. “Forget” the camera using the iOS “Settings” app.
7 Camera/iOS device: Follow the on-screen instructions to complete pairing. • Camera: The camera will display the message shown in the illustration when pairing is complete. • iOS device: Pairing is complete. Tap [OK] to exit to the tab.
D Pairing for the First Time • The first time you pair the iOS device with a camera after installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. • This prompt will not be displayed a second time. Auto link settings can however be accessed at any time using [Auto link] in the tab.
❚❚ Connecting to a Paired Device Connecting to a smart device that has already been paired with the camera is quick and easy. 1 Camera: In the setup menu, select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection], then highlight [Enable] and press J. 2 Smart device: Launch the SnapBridge app. A Bluetooth connection will be established automatically.
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi What Wi-Fi Can Do for You Connect using the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi to upload selected pictures to a computer. The Wireless Transmitter Utility Before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi, you will need to pair the camera with the computer using Nikon’s Wireless Transmitter Utility software. • Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera.
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes Either of the following two methods can be used to establish wireless connections between the camera and a computer. ❚❚ Direct Wireless Connection (Access-Point Mode) The camera and computer connect via direct wireless link. The camera acts as a wireless LAN access point, eliminating the need for wireless LAN infrastructure with its complicated settings. The computer cannot connect to the Internet while connected to the camera.
❚❚ Infrastructure Mode The camera connects to a computer on an existing network (including home networks) via a wireless router. The computer can still connect to the Internet while connected to the camera. • To create a new network profile, select [Search for Wi-Fi network] in the connection wizard. D Infrastructure Mode • • This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network. Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported.
Connecting in Access-Point Mode 1 Select [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] in the camera setup menu, then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press J. 3 Highlight [Direct connection to PC] and press J. The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.
4 Establish a connection to the camera. Windows: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar. • Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3. • When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. macOS: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar. • Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3.
5 Start pairing. When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer. 6 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility. Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 5 and click [Next>].
7 In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code displayed by the camera. • The camera will display an authentication code. • Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next>].
8 Complete the pairing process. • When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press J. • In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next>]; you will be prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility. • A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is complete.
9 Check the connection. When a connection is established, the network SSID will be displayed in green in the camera [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] menu. • If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer. A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the computer. Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in“Uploading Pictures” (0 503).
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode 1 Select [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] in the camera setup menu, then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press J. 3 Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J. The camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
D [Easy Connect] • To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press X in Step 3. Next, press J and choose from the following options: Option Description For routers that support push-button WPS. Press [Push-button the WPS button on the router and then press the WPS] camera J button to connect. The camera will display a PIN. To connect, use a computer to enter the PIN on the router. For more [PIN-entry information, see the documentation provided with WPS] the router.
4 Choose a network. • Highlight a network SSID and press J. • Encrypted networks are indicated by a u icon. If the selected network is encrypted (u), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 6. • If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search again. D Hidden SSIDs Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list. • To connect to a network with a hidden SSID, highlight a blank entry and press J.
5 Enter the encryption key. • Press the center of the multi selector and enter the encryption key for the wireless router. • For more information, see the documentation for the wireless router. • Press J when entry is complete. • Press J again to initiate the connection. A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established.
6 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J: Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
7 Start pairing. When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer. 8 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility. Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 7 and click [Next>].
9 In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code displayed by the camera. • The camera will display an authentication code. • Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next>].
10 Complete the pairing process. • When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press J. • In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next>]; you will be prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility. • A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is complete.
11 Check the connection. When a connection is established, the network SSID will be displayed in green in the camera [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] menu. • If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer. A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the computer. Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in“Uploading Pictures” (0 503).
Uploading Pictures Pictures can be selected for upload during playback. They can also be uploaded automatically as they are taken. D Destination Folders By default, images are uploaded to the following folders: • Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility • macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility. For more information, see the utility’s online help.
❚❚ Selecting Pictures for Upload 1 Press the K button on the camera and select fullframe or thumbnail playback. 2 Select a picture and press the i button. 3 Highlight [Select to send to computer] and press J. • A white “send” (priority upload) icon will appear on the picture. If the camera is currently connected to a network, upload will begin immediately. • Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established. • Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional pictures.
D Deselecting Pictures • • Repeat Steps 2–3 to remove transfer marking from selected images. To remove transfer marking from all pictures, select [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] > [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the setup menu.
❚❚ Uploading Photos as They Are Taken To upload new photos as they are taken, select [On] for [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] > [Options] > [Auto send] in the setup menu. • Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. • Movies and photographs taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display.
❚❚ The Transfer Icon Upload status is indicated by the transfer icon. u (white): Send (priority upload) The picture has been manually selected for upload. Pictures marked with this icon will be uploaded before pictures marked W (“send”). W (white): Send The picture has been selected for automatic upload but upload has not yet begun. X (green): Sending Upload in progress. Y (blue): Sent Upload complete.
❚❚ The [Connect to PC (Built-in Wi-Fi)] Status Display The [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] display shows the following: 1 2 1 Status: The status of the connection to the host. The host SSID is displayed in green when a connection is established. While files are being transferred, the status display shows “Now sending” preceded by the name of the file being sent. Errors are also displayed here.
D Loss of Signal Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of pictures with “send” marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again once the signal has been re-established.
Disconnecting and Reconnecting ❚❚ Disconnecting You can disconnect by: • turning the camera off, • selecting [Disable] for [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the setup menu, or • connecting to a smart device via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth. D Access-Point Mode An error will occur if the computer’s wireless connection is disabled before the camera’s. Disable camera Wi-Fi first.
❚❚ Reconnecting To reconnect to an existing network: • select [Enable] for [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the setup menu. D Access-Point Mode Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting. D Multiple Network Profiles If the camera has profiles for more than one network, it will reconnect to the last network used. Other networks can be selected using the [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] > [Network settings] option in the setup menu.
Troubleshooting Built-in Wi-Fi Solutions to some common issues are listed below. • Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be found in the app’s online help, which can be viewed at: https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html • For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility, see the utility’s online help. Problem Solution Connection settings require adjustment.
Problem Solution If [Auto] is selected for [Channel] when you are connecting to a smart device, choose [Manual] and select the channel manually The connection is (0 931). unreliable. If the camera is connected to a computer in infrastructure mode, check that the router is set to a channel between 1 and 8 (0 933). These options are not available when the [Connect to smart device] and [Connect to camera is connected via Ethernet or using a PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] are WT-6.
Ethernet/WT-6 Ethernet Connections and the WT-6 The camera can connect to existing networks via a third-party Ethernet cable inserted in the camera’s Ethernet connector or an optional WT-6 wireless transmitter attached via the peripheral connector. The connection is more reliable than that offered by the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility Before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi, you will need to pair the camera with the computer using Nikon’s Wireless Transmitter Utility software. • Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera. • The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the Nikon Download Center. Be sure to download the latest version after reading the release notes and system requirements. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.
What Ethernet and the WT-6 Can Do for You Ethernet and the WT-6 can be used for the following tasks. Upload to FTP Servers or Computers Not only can you copy pictures to computers, you can also upload them to ftp servers (0 585). Pictures can be uploaded as they are taken.
Computer-Based Remote Photography (Camera Control Mode) Installing Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately) on a network computer gives you complete control over camera settings and lets you take pictures remotely and save them directly to the computer hard disk (0 595). Browser-Based Remote Photography (HTTP Server Mode) Use a web browser to control the camera from network computers and smart devices (0 601). No dedicated app is required.
Camera-Based Remote Photography (Synchronized Release) A master camera can be used to control the shutters on one or more remote cameras (0 628). The cameras must have WT-6 wireless transmitters attached. Clock Synchronization (Synchronize Date and Time) Synchronize the clocks on two cameras via a network (0 633).
A Ethernet Connections Wireless LAN settings are not required when the camera is connected to a network via an Ethernet cable. A FTP Servers • Servers can be configured using standard ftp services—including IIS (Internet Information Services)—available with Windows 10 (Enterprise/ Pro/Home), Windows 8.1, and Windows 8.1 (Enterprise/Pro). • Internet ftp connections and connection to ftp servers running thirdparty software are not supported.
Connecting an Ethernet Cable or WT-6 Connecting an Ethernet Cable Insert the Ethernet cable into the camera’s Ethernet connector. Do not use force or insert the connectors at an angle. Connect the other end of the cable to the computer or router. • Select [Wired LAN] for [Wired LAN/ WT] > [Choose hardware] in the setup menu.
Attaching the WT-6 Rotate the peripheral connector cover up out of the way (q) and fully insert the connectors on the WT-6 into the camera’s peripheral connector (w). Rotate the locking wheel to lock the WT-6 in place (e). • Select [Wireless LAN] for [Wired LAN/ WT] > [Choose hardware] in the setup menu. D Choosing a Power Source To prevent the camera powering off unexpectedly during setup or data transfer, use a fully-charged battery or an optional AC adapter.
Creating a Network Profile (Ethernet) Before connecting the camera to a computer or ftp server in [Image transfer], [FTP upload], [Camera control], or [HTTP server] mode, you will need to create a network profile. • Before creating a network profile, select [Enable] for [Wired LAN/WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. • Select [Wired LAN] for [Wired LAN/ WT] > [Choose hardware] in the setup menu.
Image Transfer and Camera Control Modes Follow the on-screen instructions to create a network profile. 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT], then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. The camera will display a list of network profiles. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press 2. • You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup. • Note that [Create profile] will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles.
3 Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2. The connection wizard will start. D Manual Configuration Choose [Configure manually] to configure [FTP upload] and [HTTP server] settings manually. Choose [Connection wizard] to create network profiles for use with [Image transfer] and [Camera control]. 4 Choose a connection type. Highlight [Image transfer] or [Camera control] and press J to display the default profile name.
5 Rename the new network profile. • To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile, press J. • The profile name will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] > [Network settings] list in the camera setup menu. • To rename the profile, press the center of the multi selector.
6 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
7 Start pairing. When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer. 8 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility. Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 7 and click [Next>].
9 In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code displayed by the camera. • The camera will display an authentication code. • Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next>].
10 Complete the pairing process. • When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press J. • In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next>]; you will be prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
11 Exit the wizard. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description [Connect and exit Save the new network profile and connect to wizard] the server. [Exit wizard] Save the new network profile and exit. Connection settings for the camera and computer are now complete. Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in “Upload to Computers and FTP Servers” (0 585).
HTTP Server Mode Follow the on-screen instructions to create a network profile. 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT], then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. The camera will display a list of network profiles. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press 2. • You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup. • Note that [Create profile] will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles.
3 Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2. The connection wizard will start. D Manual Configuration Choose [Configure manually] to adjust settings manually.
4 Choose a connection type. Highlight [HTTP server] and press J to display the default profile name. 5 Rename the new network profile. • To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile, press J. • The profile name will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] > [Network settings] list in the camera setup menu. • To rename the profile, press the center of the multi selector.
6 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
7 Exit the wizard. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description [Connect and exit Save the new network profile and connect to wizard] the server. [Exit wizard] Save the new network profile and exit. Connection settings for the camera and computer are now complete. You can now access and control the camera from a computer or smart device as described in “HTTP Server” (0 601).
FTP Upload Mode Follow the on-screen instructions to create a network profile. 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT], then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. The camera will display a list of network profiles. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press 2. • You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup. • Note that [Create profile] will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles.
3 Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2. The connection wizard will start. D Manual Configuration Choose [Configure manually] to adjust settings manually.
4 Select [FTP upload]. The default profile name will be displayed when you press J. 5 Rename the new network profile. • To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile, press J. • The profile name will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] > [Network settings] list in the camera setup menu. • To rename the profile, press the center of the multi selector.
6 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J: Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
7 Choose the server type. Highlight [FTP] or [SFTP] (secure ftp) and press J. 8 Enter the IP address. • Press the center of the multi selector and enter the server URL or IP address. • Press J when entry is complete. • Press J again to connect to the ftp server. You will be prompted to choose a login method.
9 Log in. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option [Anonymous login] [Enter user ID] Description Select this option if the server does not require a user ID or password. This option can only be used with servers that are configured for anonymous login. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to choose a destination. Enter a user ID and password. Press J to log in when entry is complete. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to choose a destination.
10 Choose a destination folder. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option [Home folder] [Enter folder name] 542 Description Select this option to select the server’s home folder as the destination for pictures uploaded from the camera. A “setup complete” dialog will be displayed if the operation is successful. Enter the destination folder name manually. The folder must already exist on the server.
11 Exit the wizard. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option [Connect and exit wizard] [Exit wizard] Description Save the new network profile and connect to the server. Save the new network profile and exit. Connection settings for the camera and ftp server are now complete. You can now upload pictures as described in “Upload to Computers and FTP Servers” (0 585).
Creating Network Profiles (WT-6) Before connecting the camera to a computer or ftp server in [Image transfer], [FTP upload], [Camera control], or [HTTP server] mode, you will need to create a network profile. • Before creating a network profile, select [Enable] for [Wired LAN/WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. • Select [Wireless LAN] for [Wired LAN/ WT] > [Choose hardware] in the setup menu.
WT-6 Wireless Connection Options With a WT-6 attached, the camera can connect to computers or ftp servers using any of the following four options. Option Description Connect to computers on existing home networks or the like via a wireless router. The [Search for wireless computer can still connect to the Internet while network] connected to the camera. If the wireless router is equipped with a WPS [Push-button WPS] button, you can connect the camera to the router just by pressing the button.
Image Transfer and Camera Control Modes Follow the on-screen instructions to create a network profile. 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT], then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. The camera will display a list of network profiles. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press 2. • You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup. • Note that [Create profile] will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles.
3 Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2. The connection wizard will start. D Manual Configuration Choose [Configure manually] to configure [FTP upload] and [HTTP server] settings manually. Choose [Connection wizard] to create network profiles for use with [Image transfer] and [Camera control]. 4 Choose a connection type. Highlight [Image transfer] or [Camera control] and press J to display the default profile name.
5 Rename the new network profile. • To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile, press J. • The profile name will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] > [Network settings] list in the camera setup menu. • To rename the profile, press the center of the multi selector. 6 Choose a connection option. • Highlight one of the following options and press J. • [Search for wireless network]: Proceed to Step 7. • [Push-button WPS]: Proceed to Step 9. • [PIN-entry WPS]: Proceed to Step 10.
7 Choose a network. • When [Search for wireless network] is selected, the camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name (SSID). • Highlight a network SSID and press J. Encrypted networks are indicated by a u icon. If the selected network is encrypted (u), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 12. • If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search again.
8 Enter the encryption key. • Press the center of the multi selector and enter the encryption key for the wireless router. • For more information, see the documentation for the wireless router. • Press J when entry is complete. • Press J again to initiate the connection. A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established. • You will next be prompted to supply an IP address. Proceed to Step 12.
9 Press the WPS button on the router. • Selecting [Push-button WPS] displays a WPS dialog. • Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect. • For more information, see the documentation provided with the router. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Press J and proceed to Step 12.
10 Enter a PIN code into the router. • Selecting [PIN-entry WPS] displays a PIN. • Using a computer, enter the PIN on the router. For more information, see the documentation provided with the router. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Press J and proceed to Step 12.
11 Establish a connection to the camera. When [Direct (access point)] is selected, the camera will display an SSID and encryption key. Windows: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar. • Select the camera SSID. • Enter the camera encryption key when prompted. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Proceed to Step 13.
macOS: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar. • Select the camera SSID. • Enter the camera encryption key when prompted. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Proceed to Step 13.
12 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J: Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
13 Start pairing. When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer. 14 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility. Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 13 and click [Next>].
15 In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, enter the authentication code displayed by the camera. • The camera will display an authentication code. • Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next>].
16 Complete the pairing process. • When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press J. • In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next>]; you will be prompted to choose a destination folder. For more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
17 Exit the wizard. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option [Connect and exit wizard] [Exit wizard] Description Save the new network profile and connect to the host. Save the new network profile and exit. Wireless network profiles have now been created on both the camera and the computer. Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in “Upload to Computers and FTP Servers” (0 585).
HTTP Server Mode Follow the on-screen instructions to create a network profile. 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT], then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. The camera will display a list of network profiles. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press 2. • You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup. • Note that [Create profile] will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles.
3 Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2. The connection wizard will start. D Manual Configuration Choose [Configure manually] to adjust settings manually. 4 Choose a connection type. Highlight [HTTP server] and press J to display the default profile name.
5 Rename the new network profile. • To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile, press J. • The profile name will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] > [Network settings] list in the camera setup menu. • To rename the profile, press the center of the multi selector. 6 Choose a connection option. • Highlight one of the following options and press J. • [Search for wireless network]: Proceed to Step 7. • [Push-button WPS]: Proceed to Step 9. • [PIN-entry WPS]: Proceed to Step 10.
7 Choose a network. • When [Search for wireless network] is selected, the camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name (SSID). • Highlight a network SSID and press J. Encrypted networks are indicated by a u icon. If the selected network is encrypted (u), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 12. • If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search again.
8 Enter the encryption key. • Press the center of the multi selector and enter the encryption key for the wireless router. • For more information, see the documentation for the wireless router. • Press J when entry is complete. • Press J again to initiate the connection. A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established. • You will next be prompted to supply an IP address. Proceed to Step 12.
9 Press the WPS button on the router. • Selecting [Push-button WPS] displays a WPS dialog. • Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect. • For more information, see the documentation provided with the router. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Press J and proceed to Step 12.
10 Enter a PIN code into the router. • Selecting [PIN-entry WPS] displays a PIN. • Using a computer, enter the PIN on the router. For more information, see the documentation provided with the router. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Press J and proceed to Step 12.
11 Establish a connection to the camera. When [Direct (access point)] is selected, the camera will display an SSID and encryption key. Windows: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar. • Select the camera SSID. • Enter the camera encryption key when prompted. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Proceed to Step 13.
macOS: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar. • Select the camera SSID. • Enter the camera encryption key when prompted. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Proceed to Step 13.
12 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J: Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
13 Exit the wizard. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option [Connect and exit wizard] [Exit wizard] Description Save the new network profile and connect to the host. Save the new network profile and exit. Wireless network profiles have now been created on both the camera and the computer. You can now access and control the camera from a computer or smart device as described in “HTTP Server” (0 601).
FTP Upload Mode Follow the on-screen instructions to create a network profile. 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT], then highlight [Network settings] and press 2. The camera will display a list of network profiles. 2 Highlight [Create profile] and press 2. • You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup. • Note that [Create profile] will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles.
3 Highlight [Connection wizard] and press 2. The connection wizard will start. D Manual Configuration Choose [Configure manually] to adjust settings manually. 4 Select [FTP upload]. The default profile name will be displayed when you press J.
5 Rename the new network profile. • To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile, press J. • The profile name will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] > [Network settings] list in the camera setup menu. • To rename the profile, press the center of the multi selector. 6 Choose a connection option. • Highlight one of the following options and press J. • [Search for wireless network]: Proceed to Step 7. • [Push-button WPS]: Proceed to Step 9. • [PIN-entry WPS]: Proceed to Step 10.
7 Choose a network. • When [Search for wireless network] is selected, the camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name (SSID). • Highlight a network SSID and press J. Encrypted networks are indicated by a u icon. If the selected network is encrypted (u), you will be prompted to enter the encryption key. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 12. • If the desired network is not displayed, press X to search again.
8 Enter the encryption key. • Press the center of the multi selector and enter the encryption key for the wireless router. • For more information, see the documentation for the wireless router. • Press J when entry is complete. • Press J again to initiate the connection. A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established. • You will next be prompted to supply an IP address. Proceed to Step 12.
9 Press the WPS button on the router. • Selecting [Push-button WPS] displays a WPS dialog. • Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect. • For more information, see the documentation provided with the router. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Press J and proceed to Step 12.
10 Enter a PIN code into the router. • Selecting [PIN-entry WPS] displays a PIN. • Using a computer, enter the PIN on the router. For more information, see the documentation provided with the router. • A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Press J and proceed to Step 12.
11 Establish a connection to the camera. When [Direct (access point)] is selected, the camera will display an SSID and encryption key. Windows: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar. • Select the camera SSID. • Enter the camera encryption key when prompted. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Proceed to Step 13.
macOS: • Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar. • Select the camera SSID. • Enter the camera encryption key when prompted. The computer will initiate a connection to the camera. A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established. Proceed to Step 13.
12 Obtain or select an IP address. • Highlight one of the following options and press J: Option Description Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. A [Obtain automatically] “configuration complete” message will be displayed once an IP address has been assigned. Enter the IP address and sub-net mask manually. • Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address.
13 Choose the server type. • Highlight [FTP] or [SFTP] (secure ftp) and press J. • If you selected [Direct (access point)] in Step 6, proceed to Step 15. 14 Enter the IP address. • Press the center of the multi selector and enter the server URL or IP address. • Press J when entry is complete.
• Press J again to connect to the ftp server. You will be prompted to choose a login method. 15 Log in. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description Select this option if the server does not require a user ID or password. This option can only be used [Anonymous with servers that are configured for anonymous login] login. If login is successful, the camera will prompt you to choose a destination. Enter a user ID and password.
A Firewall Settings TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000 are used for [FTP], TCP ports 22 and 32768 through 61000 for [SFTP]. File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports. 16 Choose a destination folder. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description Select this option to select the server’s home folder as the destination for pictures uploaded from the [Home camera.
17 Exit the wizard. Highlight one of the following options and press J. Option Description [Connect and exit Save the new network profile and connect to wizard] the ftp server. [Exit wizard] Save the new network profile and exit. Wireless network profiles have now been created on both the camera and the ftp server. You can now upload pictures as described in “Upload to Computers and FTP Servers” (0 585).
Upload to Computers and FTP Servers Pictures can be selected for upload to a computer or ftp server during playback. They can also be uploaded automatically as they are taken. Connecting to a Computer or FTP Server Connect to a computer or a ftp server via Ethernet or using a wireless transmitter. 1 Select [Enable] for [Wired LAN/ WT functions]. • When you press J, the camera will connect using the most recentlyused network profile. To connect using a different profile, proceed to Step 2.
2 Choose an image transfer or ftp server profile in the [Network settings] display. • Image transfer profiles are indicated by K, ftp server profiles by N. • When you press J, the camera will exit to the [Wired LAN/WT] display and initiate the connection. The network name will be shown in green in the [Wired LAN/WT] display once a connection is established. • If the network name is not displayed in green, connect using the computer’s wireless network settings.
❚❚ Selecting Pictures for Upload 1 Press the K button on the camera and select fullframe or thumbnail playback. 2 Display or highlight a picture you want to upload. 3 Hold the J button and press the center of the multi selector. • A white “send” (priority upload) icon will appear on the picture. If the camera is currently connected to a network, upload will begin immediately. • Otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established. • Repeat Steps 2–3 to upload additional pictures.
D Deselecting Pictures • To deselect a picture, hold the J button and press the center of the multi selector again. • Transfer marking can also be removed using [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] in the playback i menu. • To remove transfer marking from all pictures, use [Wired LAN/WT] > [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the setup menu. A Using the i Menu You can also mark the current picture for upload by choosing [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] in the playback i menu.
❚❚ Uploading Photos as They Are Taken To upload new photos as they are taken, select [On] for [Wired LAN/WT] > [Options] > [Auto send] in the setup menu. • Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. • Movies and photographs taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display.
❚❚ The Transfer Icon Upload status is indicated by the transfer icon. u (white): Send (priority upload) The picture has been manually selected for upload. Pictures marked with this icon will be uploaded before pictures marked W (“send”). W (white): Send The picture has been selected for automatic upload but upload has not yet begun. X (green): Sending Upload in progress. Y (blue): Sent Upload complete.
❚❚ The [Wired LAN/WT] Status Display The [Wired LAN/WT] display shows the following: 2 Pictures/time remaining: The 3 1 Status: The status of the connection to the host. The profile name is displayed in green when a connection is established. While files are being transferred, the status display shows “Now sending” preceded by the name of the file being sent. Errors and error codes are also displayed here (0 636). number of pictures remaining and the time needed to send them.
D Loss of Signal Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost. Upload of pictures with “send” marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again once the signal has been re-established. D During Upload Do not remove the memory card or disconnect the Ethernet cable or wireless transmitter during upload.
A Connection Status Connection status is shown by the camera network indicator. Network indicator Status [Disable] selected for [Wired LAN/WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. • Ethernet cable not connected. Waiting to connect. Connected. Error. • I (off) K (green) H (flashes green) H (flashes amber) A The Viewfinder Display Connection status is also shown in the camera viewfinder. T is displayed when the camera is connected via Ethernet, U when it is connected to a wireless network.
A Firewall Settings TCP port 15740 and UDP port 5353 are used for connections to computers. File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports. A Voice Memos Voice memos will be included when the associated pictures are transmitted. They cannot, however, be uploaded separately.
Camera Control Control the camera from a computer running Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). Photos are saved directly to the computer instead of to the memory card and can consequently be taken even when no memory card inserted in the camera. • You will still need to insert a memory card when filming movies. • Note that the camera standby timer will not expire when the camera is in camera control mode.
1 Select [Enable] for [Wired LAN/ WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. • When you press J, the camera will connect using the most recentlyused network profile. To connect using a different profile, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3. • When a connection is established, the network name will be shown in green in the [Wired LAN/WT] display. • If the network name is not displayed in green, connect using the computer’s wireless network settings.
2 Choose a camera control profile in the [Network settings] display. • Camera control profiles are indicated by a L icon. • When you press J, the camera will exit to the [Wired LAN/WT] display and initiate the connection. The network name will be shown in green in the [Wired LAN/WT] display once a connection is established. • If the network name is not displayed in green, connect using the computer’s wireless network settings. 3 Launch the copy of Camera Control Pro 2 installed on the host computer.
The [Wired LAN/WT] Status Display The [Wired LAN/WT] display shows the following: 1 Status: The status of the 1 2 2 connection to the host. The profile name is displayed in green. Errors and error codes are also displayed here (0 636). Signal strength: Ethernet connections are shown by %. When the camera is connected to a wireless network, the icon instead shows the wireless signal strength.
D Ethernet Networks Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or wireless transmitter during upload or while the camera is on. D Wireless Networks Response may slow on wireless networks. A Connection Status Connection status is shown by the camera network indicator. Network indicator Status [Disable] selected for [Wired LAN/WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. • Ethernet cable not connected. Waiting to connect. Connected. Error.
A The Viewfinder Display Connection status is also shown in the camera viewfinder. T is displayed when the camera is connected via Ethernet, U when it is connected to a wireless network. The icon will flash if an error occurs. A Firewall Settings TCP port 15740 and UDP port 5353 are used for connections to computers. File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports.
HTTP Server View the pictures on the camera memory card or take photographs from the web browser on a computer or smart device. • For more information on system requirements, see “HTTP Server System Requirements” (0 608). • Up to five users can access the camera at one time. Only one, however, can take photographs or edit text. • Note that the standby timer will not expire automatically when the camera is in http server mode.
• When a connection is established, the URL to be used for connection to the camera will appear in the [Wired LAN/WT] display. 2 Choose an http server profile in the [Network settings] display. • HTTP server profiles are indicated by an M icon. • When you press J, the camera will exit to the [Wired LAN/WT] display and initiate the connection. The network name will be shown in green in the [Wired LAN/WT] display once a connection is established.
3 Launch the web browser on the computer or smart device. 4 Enter the camera URL (“http://” followed by the camera IP address) in the browser window address field. • Enter the URL shown in the camera [Wired LAN/WT] display. • A login dialog will be displayed.
5 Enter your user name and password in the web browser login dialog. • The default user name is “nikon” and the default password is blank. • The server home page will be displayed. A User Name and Password The user name and password used for login from web browsers can be selected using [Wired LAN/WT] > [Options] > [HTTP user settings] in the setup menu.
6 Click [Language] and choose the desired option. Choose the desired language.
7 Choose [Shooting/Viewer], [Viewer], or [Edit text]. Option [Shooting/ Viewer] [Viewer] [Edit text] 606 HTTP Server Description Control the camera and take pictures remotely from a web browser on a computer or smart device. You can also view pictures (0 610, 622). • Only one user can connect at a time. This option is not displayed if another user is currently connected using [Shooting/Viewer] or [Edit text].
The [Wired LAN/WT] Status Display The [Wired LAN/WT] display shows the following: 1 Status: The status of the 1 2 2 connection to the host. The camera URL is displayed when a connection is established. Errors and error codes are also displayed here (0 636). Signal strength: Ethernet connections are shown by %. When the camera is connected to a wireless network, the icon instead shows the wireless signal strength.
A HTTP Server System Requirements Operation has been confirmed with the following systems: OS Browser OS Browser OS Browser OS Browser 608 HTTP Server Windows Windows 10, Windows 8.1 • Windows 10: Microsoft Edge • Windows 8.1: Internet Explorer 11 macOS macOS version 10.14, 10.13, or 10.12 • macOS version 10.14: Safari 12 • macOS version 10.13: Safari 11 • macOS version 10.12: Safari 10 Android OS Android version 9.0 or 8.
A Connection Status Connection status is shown by the camera network indicator. Network indicator Status [Disable] selected for [Wired LAN/WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. • Ethernet cable not connected. Waiting to connect. Connected. Error. • I (off) K (green) H (flashes green) H (flashes amber) A The Viewfinder Display Connection status is also shown in the camera viewfinder. T is displayed when the camera is connected via Ethernet, U when it is connected to a wireless network.
Computer, Android, and iPad Web Browsers Click or tap to adjust camera settings. • For information on the displays for iPhones, see “iPhone Web Browsers” (0 622).
❚❚ The Shooting Window The following controls can be accessed by selecting [Shooting/ Viewer] on the server home page. To display the view through the camera lens in the viewfinder area, tap or click the “live view” button.
Option Description View the exposure indicator, the battery level, and Display panel number of exposures remaining. Camera Adjust settings for photography or movie recording. settings Adjustments are made by clicking or tapping the icons. • Photography: Release the shutter. Shutter• Filming: Start recording. Click or tap again to end release button recording. Take a test photo and display it in the viewfinder. The Test button picture is not recorded to the camera memory card.
A Enabling Live View on the Camera When the view through the camera lens is displayed in the viewfinder area, pressing the camera a button will display the view through the lens in the camera monitor. Press the a button again to end live view on the camera.
❚❚ The Viewer Window The viewer window can be accessed by selecting [Viewer] on the server home page or by clicking or tapping the “view” button in the shooting window. The viewer window offers a choice of thumbnail, film-strip, and full-frame views. Thumbnail View View multiple small (“thumbnail”) images per page.
Film-Strip View Choose the picture displayed from the thumbnails at the bottom of the window. Full-Frame View Click or tap thumbnails to display pictures full frame.
A The [Download] Button Click or tap the [Download] button to save the current picture to the computer or smart device. A Voice Memos Voice memos are listed as separate files. A Movies Movies are indicated by 1 icons.
❚❚ The Text Edit Window Selecting [Edit text] on the server home page displays the text edit window. The text edit window is used to edit the image comments and the copyright and IPTC information stored on the camera.
D Saving Changes Changes are not saved automatically. Click or tap the “save” button to save changes. D The “Clear” Button Clicking or tapping the “clear” button immediately deletes the displayed text. The text will be deleted even if you exit without clicking the “save” button.
[Image Comment] Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed in the NX Studio [Info] tab. Option [Attach comment] [Input comment] Description Select (M) this option to enable comments. The current comment will be added to all pictures taken after you click the “save” button. Input a comment up to 36 characters long. [Copyright Information] Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information can be viewed in the NX Studio [Info] tab.
D Copyright Information • To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names, disable [Attach copyright information] before lending or transferring the camera to another person. You will also need to make sure that the artist and copyright fields are blank. • Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the [Copyright information] option.
[IPTC] Embed IPTC presets in photographs as they are taken. Option [Auto embed during shooting:] [Select IPTC preset:] Description Selecting [Auto embed during shooting:] displays a list of IPTC presets. Highlight a preset and click or tap the “save” button to embed the selected preset in all subsequent photos. Select [Off] to take photos with no IPTC presets. Choosing [Select IPTC preset:] displays a list of IPTC presets. Choose a preset to copy to the camera.
iPhone Web Browsers Tap to adjust camera settings. • For information on computer, Android, or iPad displays, see “Computer, Android, and iPad Web Browsers” (0 610).
❚❚ The Shooting Window The following controls can be accessed by selecting [Shooting/ Viewer] on the server home page. Use the “live view” button to initiate live view photography (C) or ready the camera for filming (1). To exit live view, use the “live view” button to turn live view off.
A Enabling Live View on the Camera When the view through the camera lens is displayed in the viewfinder area, pressing the camera a button will display the view through the lens in the camera monitor. Press the a button again to end live view on the camera.
❚❚ The Viewer Window The viewer window can be accessed by selecting [Viewer] on the server home page or by tapping the “view” button in the shooting window. The iPhone viewer window offers a choice of thumbnail and full-frame views. Thumbnail View View multiple small (“thumbnail”) images per page. Tap thumbnails to view pictures full frame.
A Voice Memos Voice memos are listed as separate files. A Movies Movies are indicated by 1 icons. Full-Frame View Tap thumbnails to display pictures full frame.
❚❚ The Text Edit Window Selecting [Edit text] on the server home page displays the text edit window. The text edit window is used to edit the image comments and the copyright and IPTC information stored on the camera. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Home button Save button Logout button Image comment (0 617) Copyright information (0 617) IPTC information (0 617) Clear button 5 6 7 D Saving Changes Changes are not saved automatically. Tap the “save” button to save changes.
Synchronized Release About Synchronized Release Available with D6 and D5 digital cameras, synchronized release groups a master camera with up to ten remote cameras equipped with WT-6 wireless transmitters (available separately) and synchronizes the shutters on the remote cameras with the release on the master camera.
Using Synchronized Release Configure all cameras as follows: 1 In the setup menu, select [Wired LAN/WT] > [Wired LAN/ WT functions] and choose [Enable]. 2 Select [Choose hardware] > [Wireless LAN]. The camera will return to the [Wired LAN/WT] display when you press J. 3 Select [Network settings], highlight [Synchronized release], and press W (M). The camera will display synchronized release settings.
4 Adjust synchronized release settings. Configure the master and remote cameras as described below. Press 4 to return to the previous display when settings are complete. Option Description Enter a group name for the synchronized cameras. Group names can be up to 16 characters long. [Group name] • The master and remote cameras must all be in the same group. Choose a role for each camera from “master” and “remote”.
Option Description Select [On] to check whether the remote cameras are ready. • This option is available only if [Master camera] is selected for [Master/remote] on the current [Remote camera camera. check] • The camera network indicator will flash amber to warn if the number of cameras returning “ready” is less than that selected for [Number of remote cameras]. Enter the number ([1]–[10]) of remote cameras in [Number of the group.
6 Take pictures. • Pressing the shutter-release button on the master camera releases the shutters on the remote cameras. • Note that the standby timers will not expire automatically when the cameras are in synchronized release mode. A Remote Camera Check If [On] is selected for [Remote camera check], warnings will be displayed if any of the remote cameras are not ready.
Synchronizing Camera Clocks Synchronize the clocks on two cameras via a network. The clock on one camera (the “remote camera”) is set to the time on the other (the “master camera”). The changes apply to all options in the setup menu [Time zone and date] display. • The cameras can connect via Ethernet or by WT-6 wireless transmitters attached to both cameras. 1 Select [Enable] for [Wired LAN/ WT] > [Wired LAN/WT functions] in the setup menu. Repeat this step for the second camera.
2 On the master camera, select [Network settings] > [Synchronize date and time], then highlight [Make this camera the master] and press 2. • Date synchronization mode will be enabled. • Master camera clock settings will be displayed. 3 On the remote camera, select [Network settings] > [Synchronize date and time], then highlight [Make this camera a remote] and press 2. • Date synchronization mode will be enabled. • Remote camera clock settings will be displayed.
4 Press J on the remote camera. • The remote camera clock will be synchronized with the clock on the master camera via the network. • If the operation succeeds, the remote camera will display a message and exit to [Network settings]. • Repeat Steps 3–4 to synchronize the clocks on additional cameras. 5 Press J on the master camera. Date synchronization mode will end and [Network settings] options will be displayed.
Ethernet/Wireless Transmitter Troubleshooting Refer to this section for information on errors concerning Ethernet connections or the WT-6. Problems and Solutions Solutions to some common issues are listed below. Problem The camera displays a wireless error. • The camera displays a TCP/IP error. • The camera displays an ftp error. • 636 Solution Connection settings require adjustment.
Problem “Connecting to PC” does not clear from the camera display. The camera displays the message, “Ethernet cable is not connected”. The camera displays a “no memory card” error. Upload is interrupted and fails to resume. No connection is established when the camera URL is entered in a web browser in http server mode. Solution Check firewall settings (0 519). Connect an Ethernet cable or select [Wireless LAN] for [Choose hardware] (0 520, 521). The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all.
Error Codes The following messages and error codes may be displayed if an error occurs while the camera is connected via Ethernet or using a WT-6. ● “[Wireless error.]” Error code Err. 11 Err. 12 Err. 13 Err. 1F ● “[TCP/IP error.]” Error code Err. 21 Err. 22 638 Solution Confirm that the device to which you are attempting to connect is on. Check the SSID (0 941). Confirm that you are using the correct password for the selected SSID. Confirm that you are using the correct authentication method (0 941).
● “[PTP/IP error.]” Error code Err. 41 ● “[FTP error.]” Error code Err. 31 Err. 32 Err. 34 Err. 35 Err. 36 Err. 37 Err. 3F ● Solution Turn the camera off and then on again. Solution Confirm that the ftp server address is correct (0 945). Check that the login name and password are correct (0 945). Check that the destination folder name is correct (0 945). Confirm that the destination folder is not writeprotected. Check the DNS (0 944). Check firewall settings (0 519). Check PASV mode settings (0 945).
On-Camera Flash Photography “On-Camera” Versus “Remote” You can take pictures using an optional flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units. Camera-Mounted Flash Units Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera. See the following pages for more information (0 641). Remote Flash Photography Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL).
Using an On-Camera Flash 1 Mount a flash unit on the camera accessory shoe. See the manual provided with the unit for details. 2 Turn on the camera and flash unit. The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (N) will be displayed in the viewfinder when charging is complete. 3 Choose the flash control mode (0 645) and flash mode (0 131, 648).
4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture. 5 Take pictures. D Shutter Speed Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used: Mode P, A S M Shutter speed Set automatically by camera (1/250 s–1/60 s) * 1/ 250 s–30 s 1/ 250 s–30 s, Bulb, Time * Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or slow sync with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
D i-TTL Flash Control When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System is attached and set to TTL, the camera uses monitor pre-flashes for balanced or standard “i-TTL fill-flash” flash control. i-TTL flash control is not available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting System.
A The Sync Terminal A sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal (which features a JIS-B locking nut) as required. Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear-curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
Flash Control Mode When a flash unit that supports unified flash control (an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash settings can be adjusted using the [Flash control] > [Flash control mode] item in the photo shooting menu. The flash control modes available vary with the flash used. The contents of the [Flash control mode] display vary with the options selected.
• Settings for the SB-5000 can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit. Option • [TTL] • • [Auto external flash] • • • [Distancepriority manual] 646 Flash Control Mode • Description Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions. Output can be adjusted using [Flash compensation (TTL)]. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300, flash compensation can be adjusted by holding the W (M) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Option • [Manual] • • • [Repeating flash] • Description Choose the flash level manually. Flash output is selected using [Manual output amount]. The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Use [Repeating flash] > [Output] to adjust flash output and [Times] to choose the number of times the unit fires. [Frequency] controls how often the unit fires per second, measured in Hz.
Flash Modes The options available vary with the exposure mode. Option [Fill flash] (front-curtain sync) [Red-eye reduction] 648 Flash Modes Description Available in This mode is recommended in most situations. In modes P and A, shutter speed will automatically be P, S, A, M set to values between 1/250 s (or 1/8000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and 1/60 s. Use for portraits. The flash fires before the photograph is taken, reducing “red-eye”. • A flash unit with red-eye reduction is required.
Option Description Available in As for “fill flash”, except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. P, A [Slow sync] • Note that photos may be prone to blurring due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds. • Use of a tripod is recommended. Use to include background lighting in portraits. Red-eye reduction is combined with slow shutter speeds [Slow sync + to capture background lighting at red-eye] (rednight or under low light.
Option [Rear-curtain sync] s [Flash off] Description Available in The flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating the effect of a stream of light behind moving light sources. • Selecting mode P or A after choosing this option sets the flash P, S, A, M mode to slow sync. • Note that photos may be prone to blurring due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds. • Use of a tripod is recommended. The flash does not fire.
Choosing a Flash Mode Hold the W (M) button and rotate the main command dial. • The selected option is displayed in the top control panel.
1 2 3 4 652 Y icon flashes if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction. Not available in modes S and M. Fill flash is selected instead. Not available in modes S and M. Red-eye reduction is selected instead. In modes P and A, slow rear-curtain sync will be selected as shown when the W (M) button is released.
Flash Compensation Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter flash output, for example in order to change the brightness of the subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-tuned to produce the desired result. Adjusting Flash Compensation Hold the W (M) button and rotate the sub-command dial. • Choose from values of from −3 to +1.
• In general, choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit. • At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel. • Flash compensation can be viewed in the top control panel and viewfinder by pressing the W (M) button. −0.3 EV • Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output for CLS-compatible flash units, letting you take multiple photos or recompose shots without changing the flash level. Your subject need not be in the center of the frame, giving you more freedom when composing shots. • Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. 1 Assign [FV lock] to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls]. 2 Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit on the camera accessory shoe.
3 Turn the flash unit on and choose a flash control mode of monitor pre-flash qA or A. • If you are using an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 mounted on the camera accessory shoe, choose [TTL] or [Auto external flash] for [Flash control] > [Flash control mode]. • For information on other flash units, see the documentation provided with the unit. 4 Focus. Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
5 Lock flash level. • After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (N) appears in the viewfinder, press the [FV lock] control; the flash unit will emit a monitor pre-flash to determine the appropriate flash level. • Flash output will lock and an FV lock icon (r) will appear in the viewfinder. 6 Recompose the shot.
7 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock. Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to take additional shots. 8 Release FV lock. Press the [FV lock] control to release FV lock and confirm that the FV lock icon (r) is no longer displayed in the viewfinder.
Flash Info for On-Camera Units When a unit that supports unified flash control (the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash info can be viewed in the camera display. To view flash info during viewfinder photography, press the R button to activate the information display (0 1026) and then press the R button again.
Flash Control Mode Displays ❚❚ TTL 123 4 5 6 7 8 1 Flash-ready indicator (0 641) 2 Bounce icon (displayed if flash head is tilted up, left, or right) 3 Zoom head position warning 4 5 6 7 8 660 Flash Info for On-Camera Units (displayed if zoom head is not in correct position) Flash control mode (0 645) FP indicator (0 836) TTL flash compensation (0 645) Flash mode (0 131, 648) FV lock indicator (0 655) Flash compensation (0 133, 653)
❚❚ Auto External Flash 1 2 1 Flash control mode (0 645) FP indicator (0 836) 2 Auto external flash compensation (0 645) ❚❚ Distance-Priority Manual 1 2 3 1 Flash control mode (0 645) FP indicator (0 836) 2 Distance-priority manual flash compensation (0 645) 3 Distance (0 645) ❚❚ Manual 1 2 1 Flash control mode (0 645) FP indicator (0 836) 2 Flash level (0 645) Flash Info for On-Camera Units 661
❚❚ Repeating Flash 1 2 3 1 Flash control mode (0 645) 2 Output (0 645) 3 Times (0 645) Frequency (0 645) D Flash Info and Camera Settings The flash information display shows select camera settings, including exposure mode, shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity. D Changing Flash Settings Flash settings can be changed by pressing the i button in the flash info display. The options available vary with the flash unit and the settings selected. You can also test-fire the flash.
Remote Flash Photography What Is Remote Flash Photography? Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-Camera Flash Photography” (0 640). Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected to the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote flash units by f.
Using Remote Flash Units Remote flash units can be controlled via: • radio signals * (0 665), • optical signals from a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe (0 680), • radio signals, with additional lighting provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit * (0 679), or • combined radio and optical signals * (0 694). * Radio flash control is available only when a WR-R10 is connected to the camera.
Radio AWL Remote flash control provided via radio signals from a WR-R10 connected to the camera is termed “radio Advanced Wireless Lighting”, or “radio AWL”. Radio AWL is available with SB-5000 flash units. Establishing a Wireless Connection Before using radio AWL, establish a wireless connection between the WR-R10 and the remote flash units. 1 C: Connect the WR-R10. For more information, see the documentation provided with the WR-R10.
2 C: Select [Radio AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash options] in the photo shooting menu. D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller • • A WR-A10 adapter is required when using the WR-R10. Be sure to update the firmware for the optional WR-R10 wireless remote controller to version 3.0 or later before using radio AWL. For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area. 3 C: Choose a channel for the WR-R10. Set the WR-R10 channel selector to the desired channel.
4 C: Choose a link mode for the WR-R10. Select [Wireless remote (WR) options] > [Link mode] in the camera setup menu and choose from the following options: Option [Pairing] [PIN] Description The camera connects only to devices with which it has previously been paired. • This prevents signal interference from other devices in the vicinity. • Given that each device must be paired separately, PIN is recommended when connecting to a large number of devices.
5 f: Establish a wireless connection between the WR-R10 and the remote flash units. • Set the remote units to radio AWL remote mode. • Set the remote units to the channel you selected for the WR-R10 in Step 3. • Pair each of the remote units with the WR-R10 according to the option selected in Step 4: - [Pairing]: Initiate pairing on the remote unit and press the WR-R10 pairing button. Pairing is complete when the LINK lamps on the WR-R10 and flash unit flash orange and green.
7 f: Confirm that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit. In radio AWL, the flash-ready indicator will light in the camera viewfinder or flash information display when all flash units are ready. D Listing Remote Flash Units To view the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL, select [Flash control] > [Radio remote flash info] in the camera photo shooting menu. • The identifier (remote flash unit name) for each unit can be changed using flash unit controls.
Remote Flash Photography Settings are adjusted using [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu. Choose a remote flash control mode and take pictures as described below. ❚❚ Group Flash Select this item if you want to adjust settings separately for the flash units in each group. 1 C: Select [Group flash] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]. 2 C: Highlight [Group flash options] in the [Flash control] display and press 2.
3 C: Choose a flash control mode and flash level. • Choose a flash control mode and flash level for the flash units in each group. • The following options are available: Option Description TTL i-TTL flash control. Auto aperture. Available only with compatible flash qA units. M Choose the flash level manually. The remote units do not fire. [Comp.] cannot be –– (off) adjusted. 4 f: Group the remote flash units. • Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units.
5 C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. • See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information. • Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally. To test-fire the units, press the i button in the flash info display, highlight [N Test flash], and press J (0 697). 6 C: Take the photograph.
❚❚ Quick Wireless Control Select this item to control the relative balance between the remote flash units in groups A and B and adjust flash output for group C. Output for group C is adjusted manually. 1 C: Select [Quick wireless control] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]. 2 C: Highlight [Quick wireless control options] in the [Flash control] display and press 2.
3 C: Adjust quick wireless control settings. • Choose the balance between groups A and B. • Adjust flash compensation for groups A and B. • Adjust settings for group C: - Select [M] to enable or [––] to disable the units in group C. - When [M] is selected, the units in group C will fire at the chosen output.
4 f: Group the remote flash units. • Choose a group (A, B, or C). • The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any combination. 5 C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. • See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information. • Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally. To test-fire the units, press the i button in the flash info display, highlight [N Test flash], and press J (0 697). 6 C: Take the photograph.
❚❚ Remote Repeating The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. 1 C: Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]. 2 C: Highlight [Remote repeating options] in the [Flash control] display and press 2.
3 C: Adjust remote repeating options. • Adjust “output”, “times”, and “frequency”. • Enable or disable selected groups. - Select [ON] to enable the selected group, [––] to disable the selected group. 4 f: Group the remote flash units. • Choose a group (A–F) for each of the remote flash units. • The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any combination.
5 C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. • See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information. • Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally. To test-fire the units, press the i button in the flash info display, highlight [N Test flash], and press J (0 697). 6 C: Take the photograph.
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit Radio-controlled flash units (0 665) can be combined with any of the following flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe: • SB-5000: Before attaching the flash unit, set it to radio-controlled master flash mode (a d icon will appear at the top left corner of the display) and choose group or remote-repeating flash control. Once the unit is attached, settings can be adjusted from the camera menus or using the controls on the SB-5000.
Optical AWL Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from an optional flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and functioning as a master flash (optical AWL). For information on compatible flash units, see “The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)” (0 1051). • If the flash unit in question is an SB-5000 or SB-500, settings can be adjusted from the camera. For more information, see “Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500” (0 681).
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500 Mount the flash unit on the camera accessory shoe. Select [Optical AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash options] in the photo shooting menu and choose a remote flash control mode (the SB-500 supports only [Group flash]). Choose a remote flash control mode and take pictures as described below. D The SB-5000 When an SB-5000 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, [Flash control] settings can also be changed using the controls on the flash unit.
❚❚ Group Flash Select this item if you want to adjust settings separately for the flash units in each group. 1 C: Select [Group flash] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]. 2 C: Highlight [Group flash options] in the [Flash control] display and press 2.
3 C: Adjust flash output and choose the channel and flash control mode. • Choose the flash control mode and flash level for the master flash and the remote flash units in each group. • The following options are available: Option Description TTL i-TTL flash control. Auto aperture. Available only with compatible flash qA units. M Choose the flash level manually. The remote units do not fire. [Comp.] cannot be –– (off) adjusted.
4 f: Choose a channel for the remote flash units. Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for [Channel] in Step 3. 5 f: Group the remote flash units. • Choose a group (A, B, or C). • If you are using an SB-500 as the master flash, choose from groups A and B. • There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance if more flash units are used.
7 C/f: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
❚❚ Quick Wireless Control (SB-5000 Only) Select this item to control the relative balance between the remote flash units in groups A and B and adjust flash output for group C. Output for group C is adjusted manually. 1 C: Select [Quick wireless control] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]. 2 C: Highlight [Quick wireless control options] in the [Flash control] display and press 2.
3 C: Adjust quick wireless control settings. • Choose the balance between groups A and B. • Adjust flash compensation for groups A and B. • Adjust settings for group C: - Select [M] to enable or [––] to disable the units in group C. - When [M] is selected, the units in group C will fire at the chosen output.
• Choose the channel. - For [Channel], choose the channel (1–4) the master flash will use for optical remote flash control. - If the remote flash units include an SB-500, you must choose channel [3]. 4 f: Choose a channel for the remote flash units. Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for [Channel] in Step 3. 5 f: Group the remote flash units. • Choose a group (A, B, or C). • There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used.
6 C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. • See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information. • Test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally. To test-fire the units, press the test button on the master flash or press the i button in the flash info display and select [N Test flash] (0 697). 7 C/f: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
❚❚ Remote Repeating (SB-5000 Only) The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. 1 C: Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]. 2 C: Highlight [Remote repeating options] in the [Flash control] display and press 2.
3 C: Adjust remote repeating options. • Adjust “output”, “times”, and “frequency”. • Enable or disable selected groups. - Select [ON] to enable the selected group, [––] to disable the selected group. • Choose the channel. - For [Channel], choose the channel (1–4) the master flash will use for optical remote flash control. - If the remote flash units include an SB-500, you must choose channel [3].
4 f: Choose a channel for the remote flash units. Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for [Channel] in Step 3. 5 f: Group the remote flash units. • Choose a group (A, B, or C). • There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used. The practical maximum, however, is three per group, as the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance if more flash units are used. 6 C/f: Compose the shot and arrange the flash units.
7 C/f: Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit. D Optical AWL • Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the master flash. Particular care is required if the master flash is mounted on a hand-held camera. • Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in [TTL] mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units ([qA] mode).
Optical/Radio AWL For simultaneous optical and radio AWL, attach a WR-R10 and mount an SU-800 or a master flash that supports optical flash control (the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500) on the accessory shoe. • Establish connections between the WR-R10 and all radiocontrolled flash units (0 665). • If an SB-500 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, select [Optical/radio AWL] for [Wireless flash options].
Flash Info for Remote Units The camera can display flash info for a SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and configured as a master flash for optical AWL, as well as for remote flash units controlled via radio AWL using a WR-R10. To view flash info during viewfinder photography, press the R button to activate the information display (0 1026) and then press the R button again.
❚❚ Quick Wireless Control 1 2 7 3 8 4 5 6 1 Flash-ready indicator 1 2 Remote flash control (0 777) FP indicator (0 836) 3 Remote flash control mode 2 (0 776) 4 A:B ratio (0 673, 686) 5 Flash compensation (0 673, 686) 6 Group C flash control mode and flash level (output; 0 673, 686) 7 Channel 2 (0 665, 686) 8 Link mode 4 (0 926) ❚❚ Remote Repeating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 696 Flash Info for Remote Units Flash-ready indicator 1 Remote flash control (0 777) Output (0 676, 690) Remote fl
1 Displayed in radio AWL when all flash units are ready. 2 Optical AWL is indicated by Y, radio AWL by Z, joint optical and radio AWL by both icons together. Optical AWL channel for joint optical and radio AWL is displayed only when SB-500 is used as master flash. 3 Icons are displayed for each group only when joint optical and radio AWL is used. 4 Displayed only when radio AWL or joint optical and radio AWL is used.
Menu Guide Defaults The defaults for the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, and setup menus are listed below.
Playback menu option [Delete images from both slots] [Dual-format recording PB slot] [Filtered playback criteria] [Protect] [Rating] [Select to send (wired LAN/WT)] [Image review] [After delete] [After burst, show] [Rotate tall] [Copy image(s)] [Hide image] [Slide show] [Image type] [Frame interval] Default Yes (confirmation required) Slot 1 U U U Off Show next Last image in burst On — — Still images and movies 2s Defaults 699
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults Photo shooting menu option [Photo shooting menu bank] [Extended photo menu banks] [Storage folder] [Rename] [Select folder by number] [Select folder from list] [File naming] [Role played by card in Slot 2] [Image area] [Choose image area] [Auto DX crop] [Image quality] [Image size] [JPEG] [NEF (RAW)] 700 Defaults Default A Off NC_D6 100 — DSC Overflow FX (36×24) On JPEG normal Large Large
Photo shooting menu option [NEF (RAW) recording] [NEF (RAW) compression] [NEF (RAW) bit depth] [ISO sensitivity settings] [ISO sensitivity] [Auto ISO sensitivity control] [Maximum sensitivity] [Maximum sensitivity with N] [Minimum shutter speed] [White balance] [Fine-tune] [Choose color temperature] [Preset manual] [Set Picture Control] [Manage Picture Control] [Color space] [Active D-Lighting] [Long exposure NR] Default Lossless compressed 14-bit 100 Off 102400 Same as without flash Auto Auto: Keep white
Photo shooting menu option [High ISO NR] [Vignette control] [Diffraction compensation] [Auto distortion control] [Flicker reduction] [Flicker reduction setting] [Flicker reduction indicator] [Flash control] [Flash control mode] [Wireless flash options] [Remote flash control] [Auto bracketing] [Auto bracketing set] [Number of shots] [Increment] 702 Defaults Default Normal Normal On Off Disable On TTL Off Group Flash AE & flash bracketing 0F 1.
Photo shooting menu option [Multiple exposure] [Multiple exposure mode] [Number of shots] [Overlay mode] [Save individual images (NEF)] [Overlay shooting] [Select first exposure (NEF)] [HDR (high dynamic range)] [HDR mode] [Exposure differential] [Smoothing] [Save individual images (NEF)] Default Off 2 Average On On — Off Auto Normal Off Defaults 703
Photo shooting menu option [Interval timer shooting] [Choose start day/time] [Interval] [Intervals×shots/interval] [Exposure smoothing] [Silent photography] [Interval priority] [Focus before each shot] [Options] [Starting storage folder] [New folder] [Reset file numbering] 704 Defaults Default Now 1 min 0001×1 On On Off Off Off U U
Photo shooting menu option [Time-lapse movie] [Interval] [Shooting time] [Exposure smoothing] [Silent photography] [Image area] [Choose image area] [Auto DX crop] [Frame size/frame rate] [Interval priority] [Focus before each shot] [Destination] Default 5s 25 min On On FX On 1920x1080; 60p Off Off Slot 1 Defaults 705
Photo shooting menu option [Focus shift shooting] [No.
Movie Shooting Menu Defaults Movie shooting menu option [Reset movie shooting menu] [File naming] [Destination] [Image area] [Choose image area] [Auto DX crop] [Frame size/frame rate] [Movie quality] [Movie file type] [ISO sensitivity settings] [Maximum sensitivity] [Auto ISO control (mode M)] [ISO sensitivity (mode M)] [White balance] [Fine-tune] [Choose color temperature] [Preset manual] Default — DSC Slot 1 FX On 1920x1080; 60p High quality MOV 102400 Off 100 Same as photo settings A-B: 0, G-M: 0 5000K
Movie shooting menu option [Set Picture Control] [Manage Picture Control] [Active D-Lighting] [High ISO NR] [Diffraction compensation] [Flicker reduction] [Electronic VR] [Microphone sensitivity] [Attenuator] [Frequency response] [Wind noise reduction] [Headphone volume] [Timecode] [Record timecodes] [Count-up method] [Timecode origin] [Drop frame] 708 Defaults Default Same as photo settings — Off Normal On Auto Off Auto Disable Wide range Off 15 Off Record run — On
Custom Settings Menu Defaults Custom Settings menu option [Custom settings bank] a1 [AF-C priority selection] a2 [AF-S priority selection] a3 [Focus tracking with lock-on] [Blocked shot AF response] [Subject motion] a4 [Focus points used] a5 [Store points by orientation] a6 [AF activation] [Out-of-focus release] a7 [Single-point AF watch area] a8 [3D-tracking face-detection] a9 [Group-area AF face detection] a10 [Custom groupings (C1/C2)] [Group-area AF (C1)] [Group-area AF (C2)] a11 [Auto-area AF face dete
Custom Settings menu option a12 [Auto-area AF starting point] a13 [Focus point persistence] a14 [Limit AF-area mode selection] [Single-point AF] [Dynamic-area AF (9 points)] [Dynamic-area AF (25 points)] [Dynamic-area AF (49 points)] [Dynamic-area AF (105 points)] [3D-tracking] [Group-area AF] [Group-area AF (C1)] [Group-area AF (C2)] [Auto-area AF] a15 [Autofocus mode restrictions] a16 [Focus point wrap-around] a17 [Focus point options] [Manual focus mode] [Focus point brightness] [Dynamic-area AF assist]
a18 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 c1 c2 c3 Custom Settings menu option [Manual focus ring in AF mode] [ISO sensitivity step value] [EV steps for exposure cntrl] [Exp./flash comp.
c4 d1 d2 d3 712 Custom Settings menu option [Monitor off delay] [Playback] [Menus] [Information display] [Image review] [Live view] [Continuous shooting speed] [Continuous high-speed] [Continuous low-speed] [Quiet shutter release] [Max.
d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d12 d13 Custom Settings menu option [Sync. release mode options] [Exposure delay mode] [Electronic front-curtain shutter] [Extended shutter speeds (M)] [Limit selectable image area] [FX (36x24)] [1.
714 d14 d15 e1 e2 e3 e4 e5 Custom Settings menu option [Live view in continuous mode] [Optical VR] [Flash sync speed] [Flash shutter speed] [Exposure comp.
f1 Custom Settings menu option [Customize i menu] Default Set Picture Control, Color space, Photo shooting menu bank, Select custom settings bank, Flash mode, Metering, Wired LAN/WT, Active D-Lighting, Autofocus mode, AF-area mode, Focus tracking with lock-on, Custom controls Defaults 715
f2 716 Custom Settings menu option [Customize i menu (Lv)] Defaults Default Set Picture Control, Color space, Peaking highlights, Split-screen display zoom, Flash mode, Metering, Wired LAN/WT, Active D-Lighting, Autofocus mode, AF-area mode, Photo live view display WB, Custom controls
f3 Custom Settings menu option [Custom controls] [Preview button] [Fn1 button] [Fn2 button] [Fn button for vertical shooting] [Fn3 button] [AF-ON button] [Sub-selector] [Sub-selector center] [AF-ON button for vertical shooting] [Multi selector for vertical shooting] [Metering button] [BKT button] [Movie record button] [Lens focus function buttons] Default Preview Choose image area Preview AE lock (Reset on release) Voice memo AF-ON Focus point selection AE/AF lock Same as AF-ON button Same as multi select
f4 f5 f6 Custom Settings menu option [Multi selector center button] [Viewfinder photography] [Live view] [Playback mode] [Zoom on/off] [Shutter spd & aperture lock] [Shutter speed lock] [Aperture lock] [Customize command dials] [Reverse rotation] [Change main/sub] [Aperture setting] [Menus and playback] [Sub-dial frame advance] 718 Defaults Default Select center focus point Select center focus point Zoom on/off 1 : 1 (100%) Off Off Exposure compensation: U, Shutter speed/aperture: U Exposure setting:
f7 f8 f9 Custom Settings menu option [Multi selector] [Release button to use dial] [Reverse indicators] f10 [Live view button options] f11 [D switch] f12 [Full-frame playback flicks] [Flick up] [Flick down] [Flick advance direction] Default Do nothing No Enable LCD backlight (D) None None Left → Right Defaults 719
g1 g2 720 Custom Settings menu option [Customize i menu] [Custom controls] [Preview button] [Fn1 button] [Fn2 button] [Fn3 button] [Sub-selector center] [Shutter-release button] Defaults Default Set Picture Control, White balance, Frame size and rate/Image quality, Microphone sensitivity, Wind noise reduction, Metering, Wired LAN/WT, Electronic VR, Autofocus mode, AF-area mode, Destination, Custom controls None None None None AE/AF lock Take photos
g3 g4 Custom Settings menu option [Multi selector center button] [Highlight display] [Display pattern] [Highlight display threshold] Default Select center focus point Off 248 Defaults 721
Setup Menu Defaults Setup menu option [Format memory card] [Language] Default — (Varies with country or region of purchase) [Time zone and date] [Time zone] [Date and time] [Date format] [Daylight saving time] [Monitor brightness] [Monitor color balance] [Virtual horizon] [Information display] [Manual] 722 Defaults (Varies with country or region of purchase) — (Varies with country or region of purchase) Off 0 A-B: 0, G-M: 0 — Auto Dark on light
Setup menu option [AF fine-tuning options] [AF fine-tune on/off] [Fine-tune and save lens] [Default] [List saved values] [Choose value for current lens] [Non-CPU lens data] [Lens number] [Focal length (mm)] [Maximum aperture] [Clean image sensor] [Clean at startup/shutdown] [Lock mirror up for cleaning] [Image Dust Off ref photo] [Pixel mapping] [Image comment] [Attach comment] Default Off — — — — 1 — — Clean at startup & shutdown — — — U Defaults 723
Setup menu option [Copyright Information] [Attach copyright information] [IPTC] [Edit/save] [Delete] [Auto embed during shooting] [Load/save] [Voice memo options] [Voice memo] [Voice memo overwrite] [Voice memo control] [Audio output] [Beep options] [Beep on/off] [Volume] [Pitch] 724 Defaults Default U — — Off — Off Disable Press and hold Speaker/headphones Off 2 Low
Setup menu option [Touch controls] [Enable/disable touch controls] [Glove mode] [HDMI] [Output resolution] [Advanced] [Output range] [Live view on-screen display] [Dual monitor] [External recording control] [Location data (built-in)] [Record location data] [Standby timer] [Set clock from satellite] [Create log] [Log list] [Position] Default Enable Disabled Auto Auto On On Off Off Enable No — — — Defaults 725
Setup menu option [Wireless remote (WR) options] [LED lamp] [Link mode] [Assign remote (WR) Fn button] [Airplane mode] [Connect to smart device] [Pairing (Bluetooth)] [Bluetooth connection] [Select to send (Bluetooth)] [Auto select to send] [Wi-Fi connection] [Send while off] [Location data (smart device)] 726 Defaults Default On Pairing None Disable Disable Off — On —
Setup menu option [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] [Wi-Fi connection] [Network settings] [Options] [Auto send] [Delete after send] [Send file as] [JPEG+JPEG slot selection] [Deselect all?] [MAC address] Default Disable — Off No NEF (RAW) + JPEG Slot 1 — — Defaults 727
Setup menu option [Wired LAN/WT] [Wired LAN/WT functions] [Choose hardware] [Network settings] [Options] [Auto send] [Delete after send] [Send file as] [JPEG+JPEG slot selection] [Overwrite if same name] [Protect if marked to send] [Send marking] [Send folder] [Deselect all?] [HTTP user settings] [Power saving] [MAC address] [Conformity marking] 728 Defaults Default Disable Wired LAN — Off No NEF (RAW) + JPEG Slot 1 No No Off — — — Prioritize network speed — —
Setup menu option [Battery info] [Slot empty release lock] [Save/load menu settings] [Reset all settings] [Firmware version] Default — Enable release — — — Defaults 729
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images To display the playback menu, select the D (playback menu) tab in the camera menus.
Delete G button U D playback menu Delete multiple images. For more information, see “Deleting Multiple Pictures” (0 431). Option Description [Selected Delete selected pictures. Q images] [Candidates Delete pictures rated d (candidate for deletion). d for deletion] [Images shot i on selected Delete all pictures taken on selected dates. dates] Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
Playback Folder G button U D playback menu Choose a folder for playback. Option (Folder name) [All] [Current] 732 Description Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible during playback. Folders can be renamed using the [Storage folder] > [Rename] option in the photo shooting menu. Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback. Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.
Playback Display Options G button U D playback menu Choose whether the focus points used when the photograph was taken are displayed during full-frame playback. You can also choose the types of photo information that can be viewed during full-frame playback. • The shooting data displayed when [Shooting data] is selected can be chosen using [Detailed shooting data]. • Highlight options and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). • To complete the operation, press J.
Delete Images from Both Slots G button U D playback menu Choose whether deleting a copy of a picture recorded to both memory cards with either [Backup] or a dual-format option ([RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2]) selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu also deletes the remaining copy. Option Description Before deleting one copy, you will be prompted to [Yes (confirmation choose whether to delete the other.
Dual-Format Recording PB Slot G button U D playback menu Choose the slot from which dual-format pictures recorded with [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] or [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu are played back. Filtered Playback Criteria G button U D playback menu Choose the criteria used to choose the pictures displayed during filtered playback (0 427).
After Delete G button U D playback menu Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted. Option S [Show next] T [Show previous] • • • • • U 736 [Continue as before] • Description The following picture is displayed. If the deleted image was the last picture, the preceding picture will be displayed. The preceding picture is displayed. If the deleted image was the first picture, the next picture will be displayed.
After Burst, Show G button U D playback menu Choose whether the photo displayed immediately after a burst of shots is taken in continuous mode is the first or last shot in the burst. • This option takes effect only when [Off] is selected for [Image review]. 1 DSC_0001.jpg DSC_0002.jpg DSC_0003.jpg DSC_0004.jpg DSC_0014.jpg DSC_0015.
Rotate Tall G button U D playback menu If [On] is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be automatically rotated for display during playback. D Rotate Tall Images are not rotated automatically during image review even when [On] is selected for [Rotate tall]. Copy Image(s) G button U D playback menu Copy pictures from one memory card to another when two memory cards are inserted.
Copying Pictures 1 Choose [Select source]. Highlight [Select source] and press 2 to display [Select source] options. 2 Select the card containing the pictures to be copied. Highlight the slot for the card containing the pictures to be copied and press J to select the highlighted slot and return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
3 Choose [Select image(s)]. Highlight [Select image(s)] and press 2 to view the [Select image(s)] display. 4 Select the source folder. • Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press 2 to display the [Images selected by default] menu. • To copy all pictures from the card in the selected slot, highlight [All images in slot], press J, and proceed to Step 10.
5 Make the initial selection. Choose the pictures that will be selected by default. Option Description None of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected by default. [Deselect all] • Choose this option when you want to select pictures individually. All of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected by default. [Select all images] • Choose this option if you want to copy all or most of the pictures in the folder.
6 Select additional images. • Highlight pictures and press the center of the multi selector to select; selected pictures are marked with a check (L). To deselect the current picture, press the center of the multi selector again; the check (L) will no longer be displayed. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. • After confirming that you have selected (L) all the pictures you want to copy, press J to return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
8 Choose a destination folder. Choose one of the following options and press 2. Option [Select folder by number] [Select folder from list] Description Enter the number of the destination folder (0 756). If the folder with the selected number does not already exist, a new folder will be created. Choose the destination folder from a list of existing folders.
9 Select the chosen folder. After entering a folder number or highlighting the folder name, press J to select the folder and return to the [Copy image(s)] menu. 10 Choose [Copy image(s)?]. Highlight [Copy image(s)?] and press J to display a confirmation dialog. 11 Choose [Yes]. • The camera will display the message “[Copy?]” together with the number of pictures that will be copied. • Highlight [Yes] and press J to copy the selected pictures. • Press J again to exit when copying is complete.
D Copying Pictures • • • • • Pictures will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card. If the destination folder contains a file with the same name as one of the pictures to be copied, a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Select [Replace existing image] or [Replace all] to replace the existing file or files. Protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced. To continue without replacing existing files, select [Skip].
Hide Image G button U D playback menu Hidden pictures are visible only in the “hide image” menu. 1 Choose [Select/set]. Highlight [Select/set] and press 2 to display a picture-selection dialog. 2 Select pictures. • Highlight pictures using the multi selector and press the center of the multi selector to select. Selected pictures are marked with R icons. To deselect the current picture, removing the R icon, press the center of the multi selector again.
3 Save changes. Press J to complete the operation. D Hidden Pictures • • Hidden pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted. Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image. A Revealing All Hidden Pictures To reveal all pictures hidden using [Hide image], choose [Deselect all] in the [Hide image] display.
Slide Show G button U D playback menu View a slide show; pictures are displayed in the order recorded. The pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] (0 732) will be displayed one-by-one in the order recorded. Pictures hidden using [Hide image] (0 746) are not displayed. Option [Start] Description Start the slide show. • Choose the type of picture displayed. • Select [By rating] to view only pictures with [Image type] selected ratings.
The following operations can be performed while the show is in progress: To Skip back/skip ahead View additional photo info Description Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to the next frame. Press 1 or 3 to choose the photo info displayed. To hide photo info, select [None (image only)]. Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight Pause [Restart] and press J. Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (M) to decrease.
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options To view the photo shooting menu, select the C tab in the camera menus.
Item [Flicker reduction] [Flash control] [Auto bracketing] [Multiple exposure] [HDR (high dynamic range)] 0 772 774 778 779 779 Item [Interval timer shooting] [Time-lapse movie] [Focus shift shooting] [Silent live view photography] 0 780 780 780 781 C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 751
Photo Shooting Menu Bank G button U C photo shooting menu Photo shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks (banks “A” through “D”). Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others. Note, however, that changes to [Extended photo menu banks], [White balance] presets, [Multiple exposure], [Interval timer shooting], [Time-lapse movie], and [Focus shift shooting] apply to all banks.
Renaming Photo Shooting Menu Banks A descriptive caption can be added to the bank name (“A”, “B”, “C”, or “D”) by highlighting the bank and pressing 2. Captions can be up to 20 characters long. Restoring Default Settings You can restore default settings for a selected photo shooting menu bank. To do so, highlight the bank and press O (Q); a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight [Yes] and press J to restore default settings for the selected bank.
Extended Photo Menu Banks G button U C photo shooting menu Select [On] to include exposure and flash modes, shutter speed (modes S and M only), and aperture (modes A and M only) in the information recorded in each of the four photo shooting menu banks. • Changes to exposure mode, shutter speed, aperture, and flash mode will be stored in the bank currently selected for [Photo shooting menu bank]. The settings stored in the bank will be recalled the next time the bank is selected.
Storage Folder G button U C photo shooting menu Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored. 100NC_D6 D 15/ 10/ 2019 1 1 Folder 2 Folder number 3 Folder name Renaming Folders The default folder name, which appears after the folder number, is “NC_D6”. To change the name assigned to new folders, select [Rename]. • Existing folders cannot be renamed.
Select Folder by Number The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be selected by number. If a folder with the specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created. 1 Choose [Select folder by number]. • Highlight [Select folder by number] and press 2 to display the [Select folder by number] dialog. • The card on which the new folder will be created is underlined in the card slot display area at the top right corner of the [Select folder by number] dialog.
3 Save changes and exit. • If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number. Press J to complete the operation and return to the main menu; if you chose a folder marked W or X, it will be selected as the folder for new pictures. • If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a new folder will be created with that number when you press J. • In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen folder.
Select Folder from List To choose from a list of existing folders: 1 Choose [Select folder from list]. Highlight [Select folder from list] and press 2 to display the [Select folder from list] dialog. 2 Highlight a folder. Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder. 3 Select the highlighted folder. • Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main menu. • Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers • Once the folder number has reached 999, the camera will stop creating new folders automatically and disable the shutter release if: - the number of files in the folder reaches 5000 (or during movie recording, if camera calculates that the addition of the number of files needed to create a movie of maximum length would bring the total over 5000), or - the file number reaches 9999 (or during movie recording, when camera calculates that the number of files needed to create a movie
File Naming G button U C photo shooting menu Pictures are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension. [File naming] is used to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 86). D File Names • File names take the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx”. “nnnn” is a number from 0001 to 9999.
Role Played by Card in Slot 2 G button U C photo shooting menu Choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two memory cards are inserted in the camera. For more information, see “Using Two Memory Cards” (0 308). Image Area G button U C photo shooting menu Adjust image area settings. For more information, see “Adjusting Image Area Settings” (0 136). Image Quality G button U C photo shooting menu Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see “Adjusting Image Quality” (0 142).
Image Size G button U C photo shooting menu Choose the size, in pixels, of JPEG or NEF (RAW) pictures recorded with the camera. For more information, see “Choosing an Image Size” (0 145). NEF (RAW) Recording G button U C photo shooting menu Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF (RAW) photographs.
NEF (RAW) Compression Option Description NEF pictures are compressed using a reversible algorithm. The resulting files are about 60% to [Lossless 80% the size of pictures recorded using N compressed] [Uncompressed]. Image quality is the same as pictures recorded using [Uncompressed]. NEF images are compressed using a nonreversible algorithm. The resulting files are about 45% to 65% the size of pictures recorded using O [Compressed] [Uncompressed].
ISO Sensitivity Settings G button U C photo shooting menu Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs. For more information, see “Adjusting the Camera’s Sensitivity to Light (ISO Sensitivity)” (0 213). White Balance G button U C photo shooting menu Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For more information, see “Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources (White Balance)” (0 221).
Manage Picture Control G button U C photo shooting menu Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls. For more information, see “Custom Picture Controls” (0 276). Color Space G button U C photo shooting menu The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. [sRGB] is recommended for generalpurpose printing and display. With a broader gamut of colors than [sRGB], [Adobe RGB] is a better choice for professional publication and commercial printing.
Active D-Lighting G button U C photo shooting menu Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural contrast. For more information, see “Active D-Lighting” (0 281).
Long Exposure NR G button U C photo shooting menu Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken at slow shutter speeds. Option [On] [Off] Description Reduce noise in photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s. Long-exposure noise reduction disabled. • Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo is taken. During processing, “l m” will flash in the viewfinder and top control panel. Pictures cannot be taken until the display stops flashing.
High ISO NR G button U C photo shooting menu Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels). Option [High] [Normal] [Low] [Off] 768 Description Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities. The higher the sensitivity, the greater the effect. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from [High], [Normal], and [Low]. Noise reduction is performed only as required.
Vignette Control G button U C photo shooting menu Vignette control reduces “vignetting”—a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph—by an amount that varies from lens to lens. Its effects are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Vignette control applies only to photographs taken with type G, E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded). Option e [High] g [Normal] f [Low] [Off] Description Choose the amount of vignette control performed from (in order from high to low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
Diffraction Compensation G button U C photo shooting menu Select [On] to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f/numbers). • To apply diffraction compensation to pictures taken with nonCPU lenses, enter the lens data using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
Auto Distortion Control G button U C photo shooting menu Select [On] to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses. • [Auto distortion control] is available only with type G, E, and D lenses. Some lenses of these types, including PC and fisheye lenses, are, however, not supported. Results are not guaranteed with lenses that are not supported.
Flicker Reduction G button U C photo shooting menu Reduce the effects of flicker from such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps during viewfinder photography. Flicker can cause uneven exposure or (in photographs taken in continuous release modes) inconsistent exposure or coloration. Option [Flicker reduction setting] [Flicker reduction indicator] 772 Description When [Enable] is selected, the camera will time photographs to reduce the effects of flicker.
D Flicker Reduction: Restrictions The [Flicker reduction] item in the photo shooting menu does not take effect under some conditions, including: • during live view photography or when • MUP is selected for release mode, • [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the respective sub-menu during interval-timer photography, time-lapse movie recording, or focus shift, • HDR is enabled, • exposure delay mode is on, or • shutter speed is set to A (“Bulb”) or % (“Time”).
Flash Control G button U C photo shooting menu Choose a flash control mode and flash level and adjust other settings for wireless remote flash units or optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe. • For information on adjusting settings for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see “On-Camera Flash Photography” (0 640). • For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash units, see “Remote Flash Photography” (0 663).
Flash Control Mode Choose a flash control mode and adjust other settings for SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe. • The contents of the [Flash control mode] display vary with the options selected. • Settings for units other than the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300 can only be adjusted via the controls on the flash unit. • Settings for the SB-5000 can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit.
Wireless Flash Options Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote flash units. This item is available only when an SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is mounted on the camera. Option Description The remote flash units are controlled using low[Optical intensity flashes emitted by the master flash Y AWL] (0 680). [Optical/ Choose this option when using both opticallyY/Z radio AWL] and radio-controlled flash units (0 694).
Remote Flash Control Choose the remote flash control mode. Flash options can be adjusted in the flash control display; the options available vary with the option selected for [Remote flash control]. Option Description Choose a separate flash control mode for each m [Group flash] group of remote flash units (0 670, 682). Choose the balance between groups A and B [Quick wireless and adjust output for group C manually (0 673, x control] 686).
Auto Bracketing G button U C photo shooting menu Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.
Option [Increment] [Amount] Description Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot when an option other than [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set]. Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set]. Multiple Exposure G button U C photo shooting menu Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
Interval Timer Shooting G button U C photo shooting menu Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. For more information, see “Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting)” (0 331). Time-Lapse Movie G button U C photo shooting menu The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a time-lapse movie. For more information, see “Creating a Movie from Photos (Time-Lapse Movie)” (0 348).
Silent Live View Photography G button U C photo shooting menu Enable the electronic shutter during live view photography to mute shutter sounds and eliminate the vibrations produced by the mechanical shutter. For more information, see “The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography)” (0 374).
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options To view the movie shooting menu, select the 1 tab in the camera menus.
Reset Movie Shooting Menu G button U 1 movie shooting menu Restore movie shooting menu options to their default values. File Naming G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored; the default prefix is “DSC” (0 760). Destination G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the slot to which movies are recorded when two memory cards are inserted. • The menu shows the time available on each card.
Image Area G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the image area for movies. Auto DX Crop Choose whether the camera automatically uses the [DX] image area for movies recorded with a DX lens. Frame Size/Frame Rate G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more information, see “Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality” (0 294).
Movie Quality G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. For more information, see “Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality” (0 294). Movie File Type G button U 1 movie shooting menu Record movies in MOV or MP4 format. • The audio recording format varies with movie file format. Linear PCM is used for MOV files and AAC for MP4 files.
ISO Sensitivity Settings G button U 1 movie shooting menu Adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings for use during filming. Option Description Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and Hi 5. • The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO [Maximum sensitivity] sensitivity in modes P, S, and A and when [On] is selected for [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in mode M. • [On]: Enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M.
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control • “Noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may increase at high ISO sensitivities. • At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing. • The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity]. White Balance G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the white balance for movies. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos (0 764).
Set Picture Control G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose a Picture Control for movies. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos (0 764). Manage Picture Control G button U 1 movie shooting menu Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls (0 765). Active D-Lighting G button U 1 movie shooting menu Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating movies with natural contrast (0 281).
High ISO NR G button U 1 movie shooting menu Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities (0 768). Diffraction Compensation G button U 1 movie shooting menu Reduce diffraction in movies (0 770).
Flicker Reduction G button U 1 movie shooting menu Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting during live view or movie recording. [Auto], in which the camera chooses the frequency automatically, is recommended in most situations. If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the frequency of the local power supply. Choose [50 Hz] for areas with a 50 Hz power supply, [60 Hz] for areas with a 60 Hz power supply.
Electronic VR G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction during filming. Option Description Enable electronic vibration reduction during filming. • Electronic vibration reduction is not available at frame sizes of 3840 × 2160 or 1920 × 1080 crop. • Note that when [On] is selected for electronic vibration reduction, the angle of view will be reduced, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
Microphone Sensitivity G button U 1 movie shooting menu Turn external microphones or the built-in movie microphone on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Option [Auto] [Manual] Description Microphone sensitivity is adjusted automatically. Adjust microphone sensitivity manually. Choose from values of from [1] to [20]. The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity; the lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. [Microphone Turn sound recording off.
Attenuator G button U 1 movie shooting menu Select [Enable] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording movies in loud environments. Frequency Response G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the frequency response of external microphones and the built-in movie microphone. Option S [Wide range] T [Vocal range] Description Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for everything from music to the bustling hum of a city street. Choose for human voices.
Wind Noise Reduction G button U 1 movie shooting menu Select [On] to enable the low-cut filter, reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the built-in microphone when filming movies. Note that other sounds may also be affected. Selecting [On] for [Wind noise reduction] has no effect on optional stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
Timecode G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute, second, and frame number for each frame when recording movies. Time codes are available only with movies recorded in MOV format. Before using this feature, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date. Option Description [On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the monitor.
Option Description [Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while recording is in progress. • [Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously. Time codes continue to be incremented while the camera is off. • [Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00. • [Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and frame number manually. • [Current time]: Set the time code to the current time as reported by the camera clock.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings To view Custom Settings, select the A tab in the camera menus. Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences. The Custom Settings menu is divided into two levels.
The following Custom Settings are available: 1 Item [Custom settings bank] a [Autofocus] [AF-C priority a1 selection] [AF-S priority a2 selection] [Focus tracking with a3 lock-on] a4 [Focus points used] [Store points by a5 orientation] a6 [AF activation] [Single-point AF a7 watch area] [3D-tracking facea8 detection] [Group-area AF face a9 detection] 798 0 802 a10 804 a11 805 a12 805 a13 807 a14 808 a15 810 811 a16 a17 811 a18 Item [Custom groupings (C1/C2)] [Auto-area AF face detection] [Auto
Item b [Metering/exposure] [ISO sensitivity step b1 value] [EV steps for exposure b2 cntrl] [Exp./flash comp. step b3 value] [Easy exposure b4 compensation] b5 [Matrix metering] [Center-weighted b6 area] [Fine-tune optimal b7 exposure] [Keep exp. when f/ b8 changes] c [Timers/AE lock] [Shutter-release c1 button AE-L] c2 [Standby timer] c3 [Self-timer] c4 [Monitor off delay] 0 818 818 818 819 820 820 821 1144 822 822 823 823 Item d [Shooting/display] [Continuous shooting d1 speed] [Max.
Item e [Bracketing/flash] e1 [Flash sync speed] e2 [Flash shutter speed] [Exposure comp.
Item g [Movie] g1 [Customize i menu] g2 [Custom controls] [Multi selector center g3 button] g4 [Highlight display] 0 877 879 884 884 1 Items that have been modified from default values are indicated by asterisks (“U“). 2 Available with compatible lenses only. 3 Available only with compatible AF-P lenses not equipped with a vibration reduction switch.
Custom Settings Bank G button U A Custom Settings menu Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks (banks “A” through “D”). Changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks using [Custom Settings bank] and adjust settings as desired. Renaming Custom Settings Banks A descriptive caption can be added to the bank name (“A”, “B”, “C”, or “D”) by highlighting the bank and pressing 2.
Restoring Default Settings You can restore default settings for a selected Custom Settings bank. To do so, highlight the bank and press O (Q); a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight [Yes] and press J to restore default settings for the selected bank.
a: Autofocus a1: AF-C Priority Selection G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when AF-C is selected. Option G [Release] B [Focus + release] E [Release + focus] F [Focus] Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
a2: AF-S Priority Selection G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when AF-S is selected. Option G [Release] F [Focus] Description Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority). Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Blocked Shot AF Response Option [5 (Delayed)] [4] [3] [2] [1 (Quick)] Description Choose how quickly focus responds when something passes between the subject and the camera. • Choose [5 (Delayed)] to help maintain focus on your original subject. • Choose [1 (Quick)] to make it easier to shift focus to objects crossing your field of view. • Regardless of the option selected, blocked shot AF response functions in mode [3] when [3D-tracking] is selected for AFarea mode.
a4: Focus Points Used G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection when an option other than [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder photography. [105 points] [27 points] [15 points] • Choose [27 points] or [15 points] for quick focus-point selection. • Different groupings are available when [Group-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
a5: Store Points by Orientation G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether separate focus points and AF-area modes can be selected for “wide” (landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the camera rotated 90° counterclockwise. The selected option applies only during viewfinder photography. • Select [Off] to use the same focus point regardless of camera orientation.
• Choose [Focus point] to enable separate focus-point selection. To enable separate selection of both the focus point and the AF-area mode, choose [Focus point and AF-area mode].
a6: AF Activation G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus. Option [Shutter/ AF-ON] [AF-ON only] • Description The camera focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. The camera does not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Highlighting [AF-ON only] and pressing 2 displays [Out-offocus release] options.
a7: Single-Point AF Watch Area G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the area from which data are obtained to assist focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway with [Single-point AF] or [Dynamic-area AF] selected for AF-area mode. Option [Normal] [Wide] Description The camera locates subjects based solely on data from the vicinity of the selected point. The camera uses data from surrounding areas to locate subjects slightly outside the selected focus point. Use for fast-moving subjects.
a9: Group-Area AF Face Detection G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when [Group-area AF], [Group-area AF (C1)], or [Group-area AF (C2)] is selected for AF-area mode. a10: Custom Groupings (C1/C2) G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the dimensions of the AF-area groupings for [Grouparea AF (C1)] or [Group-area AF (C2)]; a total of 17 different options are available. For more information, see “Custom Focus Groups” (0 167).
a12: Auto-Area AF Starting Point G button U A Custom Settings menu Selecting [Enable] lets you use the multi selector to choose the starting focus point when AF-C and [Auto-area AF] are selected respectively for AF mode and AF-area mode. The camera will revert to normal auto-area AF once you have focused on the subject in the selected focus point.
Option [Auto] [Off] Description The focus point last chosen by the camera before you switched AF-area modes remains in effect. The focus point last chosen by the user is restored. a14: Limit AF-Area Mode Selection G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the AF-area modes that can be selected by pressing the AF-mode button and rotating the sub-command dial. • Highlight an option and press 2 to select; selected items are marked with a check (M).
a15: Autofocus Mode Restrictions G button U A Custom Settings menu Restrict the camera to a single autofocus mode during viewfinder photography. If [AF-S] or [AF-C] is selected, the remaining mode cannot be chosen using the AF-mode button and main command dial. a16: Focus Point Wrap-Around G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display to another.
Manual Focus Mode Option Description [On] The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode. [Off] The focus point is displayed only during focus-point selection. Focus Point Brightness Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the viewfinder. Dynamic-Area AF Assist Choose whether the camera displays both the selected focus point and the surrounding focus points used to assist the focus operation in dynamic-area AF-area mode.
a18: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode G button U A Custom Settings menu This item is available with compatible lenses only. Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in autofocus mode. Option [Enable] [Disable] Description Autofocus can be overridden by rotating the lens focus ring (autofocus with manual override). The focus ring can be used for manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
b: Metering/Exposure b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value G button U A Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making adjustments to ISO sensitivity. If the value currently selected for ISO sensitivity is not available at the chosen setting, ISO sensitivity will be set to the nearest available value. b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl G button U A Custom Settings menu Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing. b3: Exp./Flash Comp.
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether adjustments to exposure compensation can be made by rotating a command dial without pressing the E button. Option [On (Auto reset)] [On] [Off] Description Adjustments can be made using only a command dial. Settings selected with a command dial alone are reset when the camera is turned off or the standby timer expires. Adjustments can be made using only a command dial.
b5: Matrix Metering G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether [Matrix metering] assigns priority to faces detected by the camera. This setting applies only during viewfinder photography. Option [Face detection U on] [Face detection V off] Description Matrix metering assigns priority to faces detected by the camera. Matrix metering does not assign priority to faces detected by the camera.
b7: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure G button U A Custom Settings menu Use this item to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera; exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method. Exposure can be adjusted up for brighter exposures or down for darker exposures in the range +1 to −1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV. The default is 0. D Fine-Tuning Exposure • Custom Setting b7 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] fine-tunes exposure separately for each Custom Settings bank.
c: Timers/AE Lock c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed. Option Description Pressing the shutter-release button halfway O [On (half press)] locks exposure. [On (burst Exposure only locks while the shutter-release P mode)] button is pressed all the way down. Pressing the shutter-release button does not [Off] lock exposure.
c3: Self-Timer G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the length of the shutter-release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode. Option [Self-timer delay] Description Choose the length of the shutter-release delay. Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots [Number of shots] taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed; choose from values of from 1 to 9. [Interval between Choose the interval between shots when [Number shots] of shots] is more than 1.
d: Shooting/Display d1: Continuous Shooting Speed G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the frame advance rate for CH (continuous high-speed) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes and during burst photography in mode Q. Option [Continuous high-speed] [Continuous low-speed] [Quiet shutter release] 824 Description Set the frame advance rate for continuous high-speed (CH) mode to values between [14 fps] and [10 fps].
d2: Max. Continuous Release G button U A Custom Settings menu The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 200. • Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M. D The Memory Buffer Custom Setting d2 [Max.
d3: Limit Release Mode Selection G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the release modes that can be accessed by pressing the S button and rotating the main command dial when the release mode dial is rotated to S. • Highlight an option and press 2 to select; selected items are marked with a check (M). To deselect (remove the check from: U) a selected option, highlight it and press 2 again. Modes marked with a check (M) are available for selection via the main command dial.
d5: Exposure Delay Mode G button U A Custom Settings menu In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the mirror is raised. d6: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter G button U A Custom Settings menu Enable or disable the electronic front-curtain shutter. Enabling the electronic front-curtain shutter helps reduce blur caused by camera shake. The electronic front-curtain shutter is available in Q and MUP release modes.
D The Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter • Pictures taken with lenses of types other than G, E, or D may contain “noise” such as lines or fog. Select [Disable] should you notice this to be the case. • Regardless of the option selected, the camera uses the mechanical shutter in release modes other than Q and MUP. • The fastest shutter speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with the electronic front-curtain shutter are 1/2000 s and ISO 102400, respectively.
d8: Limit Selectable Image Area G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the options that can be accessed by rotating a command dial while pressing a control to which [Choose image area] has been assigned using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls]. • Highlight an option and press 2 to select; selected items are marked with a check (M). To deselect (remove the check from: U) a selected option, highlight it and press 2 again.
d9: File Number Sequence G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose a file numbering option. Option [On] [Off] [Reset] 830 Description When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted in the camera, file numbering will continue from the last number used. This simplifies file management by minimizing the occurrence of duplicate file names when multiple cards are used. When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted, file numbering restarts from 0001.
D File Number Sequence • If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will restart from 0001.
d10: Peaking Highlights G button U A Custom Settings menu When focus peaking is enabled in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. You can choose the color. Option [Peaking level] [Peaking highlight color] Description Choose from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2 (standard)], [1 (low sensitivity)], and [Off]. The higher the value, the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus.
d12: Rear Control Panel G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the information displayed in the rear control panel in the location shown. Option Description [Release mode] The camera displays the current release mode. The camera displays the number of pictures in the [Frame count] current folder. d13: LCD Illumination G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose when the control panel and button backlights light. • If [Off] is selected, the backlights will light when the power switch is rotated to D.
A Button Backlights The following are equipped with backlights: 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 13 16 17 14 834 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 I button BKT button Release mode dial pointer Y button O (Q) button K button G button g (h/Q) button X button W (M) button J button Fn3 (C) button S button T button a button R button U button A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
d14: Live View in Continuous Mode G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the monitor remains on in live view while burst photography is in progress. If [Off] is selected, both the monitor and the monitor backlight will turn off during exposures. d15: Optical VR G button U A Custom Settings menu This item is available only with compatible AF-P lenses not equipped with a vibration reduction switch.
e: Bracketing/Flash e1: Flash Sync Speed G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the flash sync speed. Option [1/250 s (Auto FP)] 836 Description Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with compatible flash units and the maximum sync speed for other flash units is set to 1/250 s. • When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s.
Option [1/250 s] [1/200 s] [1/160 s] [1/125 s] [1/100 s] [1/80 s] [1/60 s] Description Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from to 1/60 s. 1/ 250 D Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit In modes S and M, shutter speed can be fixed at the value selected for Custom Setting e1 [Flash sync speed] by selecting the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %).
e2: Flash Shutter Speed G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a flash in modes P and A. Regardless of the setting chosen for e2 [Flash shutter speed], shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync. e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
e4: Auto N ISO Sensitivity Control G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled. Option e [Subject and background] f [Subject only] Description The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity. ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed.
e5: Flash Burst Priority G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether optional flash units emit monitor pre-flashes before each shot during burst photography in modes CL and CH. Option S y Description The flash unit emits a monitor pre-flash before the first shot in each sequence and locks output at the metered value for the remaining shots. The frame [Prioritize advance rate drops less than when [Prioritize frame advance rate] precise flash control] is selected.
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) G button U A Custom Settings menu Custom Setting e7 [Auto bracketing (Mode M)] determines the settings affected when exposure or flash bracketing is enabled in mode M using [Auto bracketing set].
A Flash Bracketing Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or qA (auto aperture) flash control. e8: Bracketing Order G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program are taken. Option • 842 H [MTR > under > over] I [Under > MTR > over] Description The unmodified shot is taken first, followed by the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the highest value. Shooting proceeds in order from the lowest to the highest value.
e9: Bracketing Burst Options G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether, during bracketing, the camera continues to take pictures while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. Option [Enable] [Disable] Description The camera takes pictures continuously while the shutterrelease button is pressed all the way down. • In release modes S and Q, shooting will end after all the shots in the bracketing sequence have been taken.
f: Controls f1: Customize i Menu G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed during viewfinder photography. For information on customizing the i menu, see “Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu” (0 377).
Item [Flash mode] [Flash Y compensation] [Group flash m options] D [Autofocus mode] t [AF-area mode] t [Auto bracketing] $ [Multiple exposure] [HDR (high 2 dynamic range)] [Interval timer 7 shooting] 8 [Time-lapse movie] N 0 648 653 670 149 153 249 318 283 331 348 Item [Focus shift 9 shooting] [Select custom E settings bank] [Focus tracking F with lock-on] w [Custom controls] [Exposure delay z mode] [Electronic frontx curtain shutter] [Bluetooth Z connection] U [Wi-Fi connection] j [Wired LAN/WT] 0 360
f2: Customize i Menu (Lv) G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed during live view. For information on customizing the i menu, see “Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu” (0 377).
2 7 8 9 L w Item [HDR (high dynamic range)] [Interval timer shooting] [Time-lapse movie] [Focus shift shooting] [Silent live view photography] [Custom controls] 0 283 331 348 360 374 850 Item [Exposure delay z mode] [Electronic frontx curtain shutter] [Peaking W highlights] [Monitor 3 brightness] [Photo live view k display WB] [Bluetooth Z connection] U [Wi-Fi connection] j [Wired LAN/WT] [Split-screen z display zoom] 0 827 827 832 889 848 929 932 937 849 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Photo Live View Display WB In live view, white balance for the monitor (monitor hue) can be set separately from the white balance for photography (photographic white balance). Hues in the monitor may differ from those in pictures taken with an option such as [Flash] or [Preset manual] selected for photographic white balance. Matching monitor hue to photographic white balance gives you a more accurate preview of how pictures will turn out.
Split-Screen Display Zoom Display two areas, aligned horizontally but in different parts of the frame, sideby-side at a high zoom ratio. This makes it easier to level photographs of buildings or other wide objects. Selecting this option splits the display into two boxes arranged side-by-side showing the two areas at a high zoom ratio (split-screen display zoom). The boxes display magnified views of the areas indicated by the frames (r) in the navigation window.
f3: Custom Controls G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the operations performed during still photography either by pressing camera controls or by pressing controls and rotating command dials. • Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired control and press J.
• The roles that can be assigned are listed below. The roles available vary with the control. Role A [Preset focus point] Description Pressing the control selects a preset focus point. • To choose the point, highlight it, hold the control, and press the AF-mode button until the focus point flashes.
Role Description Holding the control selects a preset AF-area mode. The mode previously in effect is restored [AF-area when the control is released. x mode] • To choose the AF-area mode, press 2 when [AF-area mode] is highlighted. Holding the control selects a preset AF-area mode and initiates autofocus. The AF-area mode [AF-area mode previously in effect is restored when the control q is released. + AF-ON] • To choose the AF-area mode, press 2 when [AF-area mode + AF-ON] is highlighted.
Role Description Exposure locks when the control is pressed. [AE lock (Reset Exposure remains locked until the control is D pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or on release)] the standby timer expires. C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed. Focus and exposure lock while the control is B [AE/AF lock] pressed. Press the control to lock flash value for optional r [FV lock] flash units; press again to cancel FV lock.
Role [Recall o shooting functions] 854 Description Hold the control to recall previously-selected settings. • To choose the settings recalled, press 2 when [Recall shooting functions] is highlighted. - Press 1 or 3 to highlight items and press 2 to view options. Press J to save changes and exit. - To store current camera settings for later recall using this option, select [Save current settings].
Role Description If the control is pressed when an option other than [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu in release mode CH or CL or during burst photography in mode Q, the camera will take all the shots in the current bracketing program and repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is pressed. In release modes S and Q, shooting will end after the first bracketing burst.
Role c 856 [Sync. release selection] Description When an optional wireless transmitter or wireless remote controller is connected, the control can be used to toggle between remote release and master or synchronized release. The options available depend on the setting chosen for Custom Setting d4 [Sync. release mode options]. • The following options are available when [Sync] is selected for [Sync.
Role Description If a JPEG option is currently selected for image quality, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the control is pressed (until the picture is taken, “RAW” will appear in the image-quality display in the rear control panel). The original image quality setting will be restored when you remove your finger from the shutter-release button or press the control again, canceling [+ NEF (RAW)].
Role [Access top 3 item in MY MENU] K [Playback] l W K G n z J 858 Description Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item. Press the control to start playback. Press the control to view only pictures that meet [Filtered the criteria selected for [Filtered playback playback] criteria] in the playback menu.
Role [Active y D-Lighting] [Exposure z delay mode] $ v w v E Description Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active D-Lighting. Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the shutter-release delay. Press the control and rotate the main command [Shutter spd & dial to lock shutter speed (modes S and M). To aperture lock] lock aperture (modes A and M), press the control and rotate the sub-command dial.
Role 9 [ISO sensitivity] w [Metering] c [Rating] t [Auto bracketing] $ [Multiple exposure] [HDR (high 2 dynamic range)] 860 Description Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose a value for ISO sensitivity. Press the control and rotate the sub-command dial to adjust auto ISO sensitivity control settings. Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a metering option. To rate the current picture in playback mode, press the control and rotate the main command dial.
Role Description Pressing the selected control up, down, left, or right has the same effect as pressing 1, 3, 4, or 2 on the multi selector. • If this option is assigned to the sub-selector, the role played by the sub-selector during playback zoom can be chosen from [Scroll] and [Display next/previous frame]. • If this option is assigned to the multi selector for vertical shooting, you can select the role [Same as multi played by the control during playback using Y selector] [Photo info/playback].
D Virtual Horizon If you press a control to which [Press] > [Viewfinder virtual horizon] has been assigned, the camera will display pitch and roll indicators in the viewfinder based on information from its built-in tilt sensor.
Pitch Camera tilted forward Camera level Camera tilted back • Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back. The camera will not display pitch and roll indicators when held at angles at which tilt cannot be measured. • The roles of the pitch and roll indicators are reversed when the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
Viewfinder Photography Role [Select center K focus point] A [Preset focus point] [None] 864 Description Pressing the center of the multi selector selects the center focus point. Pressing the center of the multi selector selects a preset focus point. • To choose the point, highlight it, hold the center of the multi selector, and press the AF-mode button until the focus point flashes.
Live View Role [Select center K focus point] X [Zoom on/off] [None] Description Pressing the center of the multi selector selects the center focus point. Press the center of the multi selector to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (the zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press again to return to the previous display. • To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom on/off] and press 2. Pressing the center of the multi selector has no effect.
Playback Mode Regardless of the option selected, pressing the center of the multi selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback. Role Description Press the center of the multi selector to view only pictures that meet the criteria selected [Filtered l for [Filtered playback criteria] in the playback] playback menu. Press the center of the multi selector to [Thumbnail on/ toggle between full-frame and 4-, 9-, or 72n off] frame thumbnail playback.
f5: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock G button U A Custom Settings menu Selecting [On] for [Shutter speed lock] locks shutter speed at the value currently selected in mode S or M. Selecting [On] for [Aperture lock] locks aperture at the value currently selected in mode A or M. • Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode P. f6: Customize Command Dials G button U A Custom Settings menu Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse Rotation Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for exposure compensation and shutter speed/aperture selection. • Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/ aperture] and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). • Press J to save changes and exit. • The changes apply also to the command dials for vertical shooting. Change Main/Sub Reverse the roles of the main- and sub-command dials. The changes apply also to the command dials for vertical shooting.
Aperture Setting Choose whether aperture can be adjusted using the aperture ring on CPU lenses in modes A and M. Option [Subcommand dial] [Aperture ring] Description Aperture can only be adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main command dial if [On] is selected for [Change main/sub] > [Exposure setting]). Aperture can be adjusted with the lens aperture ring. The camera aperture display shows aperture in increments of 1 EV, although fractions of 1 EV can still be selected using the aperture ring.
Menus and Playback Choose the roles played by the multi selector and command dials during playback and menu navigation. Option [On] Description Playback: • The main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback. The sub-command dial can be used to skip forward or back according to the option selected for [Sub-dial frame advance]. • During thumbnail playback, the main command dial can be used to highlight thumbnails and the sub-command dial to page up or down.
Sub-Dial Frame Advance Choose the number of frames that can be skipped by rotating the sub-command dial during full-frame playback. This option only takes effect when [On] or [On (image review excluded)] is selected for [Menus and playback]. Option [10 frames] [50 frames] c P C 1 u Description Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time. Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time. Skip to the next or previous pictures with the [Rating] selected rating. To choose the rating, highlight [Rating] and press 2.
f7: Multi Selector G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether using the multi selector reactivates the standby timer. f8: Release Button to Use Dial G button U A Custom Settings menu Selecting [Yes] allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires.
f9: Reverse Indicators G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the exposure indicators in the top control panel and information display are shown with negative values on the left and positive values on the right, or with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Option V W Description The indicator is displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. The indicator is displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right.
f10: Live View Button Options G button U A Custom Settings menu The a button can be disabled to prevent live view starting accidentally when the a button is pressed. Option [Enable] [Enable (standby f timer active)] [Disable] Description Pressing the a button starts live view. Pressing the a button starts live view only when the standby timer is active. Pressing the a button does not start live view.
f12: Full-Frame Playback Flicks G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the role assigned to the flick up, down, left, or right gestures during full-frame playback. Flick Up/Flick Down Choose the operation performed by flicking up or down. Option Description Assign the current picture a pre-selected rating. The [Rating] rating can be chosen by pressing 2.
Flick Advance Direction Choose the gesture used for frame advance. Option S [Left ← Right] T [Left → Right] 876 Description Flick from right to left to view the next picture. Flick from left to right to view the next picture.
g: Movie g1: Customize i Menu G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed during movie recording. For information on customizing the i menu, see “Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu” (0 377).
7 8 w W 9 3 Item [Wind noise reduction] [Headphone volume] [Custom controls] [Peaking highlights] [Highlight display] [Monitor brightness] 0 794 794 879 832 884 Item [Bluetooth Z connection] U [Wi-Fi connection] j [Wired LAN/WT] [Multi-selector W power aperture] [Multi selector X exposure comp.] 0 929 932 937 878 878 889 Multi-Selector Power Aperture Choose whether the multi selector can be used for power aperture. When [Enable] is selected, holding 1 widens the aperture.
g2: Custom Controls G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the functions performed either by pressing camera controls or by pressing controls and rotating command dials during filming. • Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired control and press J.
• The roles that can be assigned are listed below. The roles available vary with the control. Role 880 t [Power aperture (open)] q [Power aperture (close)] i [Exposure compensation +] h [Exposure compensation −] b [Framing grid display] Description Aperture widens while the Pv button is pressed. Use in combination with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn1 button] > [Power aperture (close)] for button-controlled aperture adjustment. Aperture narrows while the Fn1 button is pressed.
Role X O 3 K F E X Description Press the control to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (the zoom ratio is selected in advance). Press again to [Zoom on/off] cancel zoom. To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom on/off] and press 2. [MY MENU] Press the control to display “MY MENU”. Press the control to jump to the top item in “MY [Access top item MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a in MY MENU] frequently-used menu item.
Role C [AE lock only] Description Exposure locks while the control is pressed. Focus and exposure lock while the control is B [AE/AF lock] pressed. Press the shutter-release button all the way down to take a photograph with an aspect ratio C [Take photos] of 16:9. Press the shutter-release button halfway to start live view. If the focus mode selector is in the AF position, you can then press the shutterrelease button halfway again to focus.
Role J [Choose image area] [Microphone sensitivity] [None] H Description Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the image area for movies. Note that the image area cannot be changed while recording is in progress. Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust microphone sensitivity. The control has no effect. D Power Aperture • Power aperture is available only in modes A and M. A 6 icon displayed in the monitor indicates that power aperture cannot be used.
g3: Multi Selector Center Button G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the role assigned to the center of the multi selector during filming. Role [Select center K focus point] Description Pressing the center of the multi selector selects the center focus point. Press the center of the multi selector to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point (the zoom ratio is selected in X [Zoom on/off] advance). Press again to return to the previous display.
Display Pattern To enable the highlight display for movie recording, select [Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2]. Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Highlight Display Threshold Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If [255] is selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup To view the setup menu, select the B tab in the camera menus.
Item [Assign remote (WR) Fn button] [Airplane mode] [Connect to smart device] [Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)] 0 928 929 929 932 Item [Wired LAN/WT] [Conformity marking] [Battery info] [Slot empty release lock] [Save/load menu settings] [Reset all settings] [Firmware version] 0 937 949 950 951 952 957 957 * Not available at battery levels of J or below. Format Memory Card G button U B setup menu Format memory cards. To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select [Yes].
D During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards until the message [Formatting memory card.] clears from the display. A Two-Button Format • Press and hold the O (Q) and S (Q) buttons simultaneously for over two seconds until C starts to flash in the viewfinder and top control panel; you can then press the two buttons (O/Q and S/Q) again to format the memory card shown by the flashing indicator in the top control panel.
Time Zone and Date G button U B setup menu Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend that the camera clock be adjusted regularly. Option Description Choose a time zone. [Date and time] is automatically set [Time zone] to the time in the new time zone. [Date and Set the camera clock to the time in the selected [Time time] zone]. Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are [Date format] displayed. Select [On] to turn daylight saving time on, [Off] to turn [Daylight it off.
Monitor Color Balance G button U B setup menu Adjust monitor color balance to your taste. Color balance is adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4, or 2 to adjust color balance as shown below. Press J to save changes. • 1 4 • 890 2 1 2 3 4 Increase green Increase amber Increase magenta Increase blue 3 Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and the view through the lens displayed during live view; pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
• The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card contains no pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead. • To choose a different picture, press the W (M) button. Highlight the desired picture and press J to select it as the reference image. • To view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold X.
Virtual Horizon G button U B setup menu Display roll and pitch information based on information from the camera tilt sensor. • If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the roll reference line will turn green. If the camera is tilted neither forward nor back, the dot (I) in the center of the display will turn green. • Each division is equivalent to 5°.
Information Display G button U B setup menu Adjust the appearance of the information display according to lighting conditions. Dark on light Light on dark Option Description The camera adjusts the color of the lettering in the [Auto] information display to make it easier to read. Black is used in bright locations, a dim white in dark locations. Manually choose the color of the lettering.
AF Fine-Tuning Options G button U B setup menu Fine-tune focus for the current lens. Use only as required. • We recommend that you perform finetuning at a focus distance you use frequently. If you perform fine-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances. • Option [AF fine-tune on/off] [Fine-tune and save lens] [Default] 894 Description [On]: Turn AF fine-tuning on. [Off]: Turn AF fine-tuning off. Fine-tune focus for the current CPU lens (0 897).
Option Description List values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens]. Highlighting a lens in the list and pressing 2 displays a [Choose lens number] dialog. • The [Choose lens [List saved number] dialog is used to choose the lens values] identifier. Choosing a unique identifier—such as the last two digits of the lens serial number—helps you distinguish between multiple lenses of the same type. • With some lenses, the serial number will automatically be entered as the lens identifier.
D Live View Photography The fine-tuning value selected using [AF fine-tuning options] is not applied to autofocus during live view photography. D Teleconverters Separate values can be saved for lenses with teleconverters attached, even if values already exist for the same lenses without teleconverters. D Deleting Saved Values To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the desired lens in the [List saved values] list and press O (Q).
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values 1 Attach the lens to the camera. 2 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then highlight [Fine-tune and save lens] and press 2. An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed. The options displayed vary with whether the attached lens is a zoom lens or has a fixed focal-length.
3 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus. • Choose from values between +20 and −20. The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by j. • If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate finetuning values for maximum angle (WIDE) and maximum zoom (TELE). Use 1 and 3 to choose between the two. • The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point. • 4 Press J to save the new value.
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value 1 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu, then highlight [Default] and press 2. 2 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus. • Choose from values between +20 and −20. The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected value by j. • The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point is from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point. • 3 Press J to save the new value.
Auto AF Fine-Tuning To use auto AF fine-tuning: 1 Rotate the live view selector to C and press the a button. 2 Press the AF-mode and movie-record buttons simultaneously and keep them pressed for over two seconds.
Zoom Lenses • The camera will display options for fine-tuning autofocus separately at maximum angle and maximum zoom. • Highlight [WIDE] (maximum angle) or [TELE] (maximum zoom) and press J; the camera will select the center focus point and the auto AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed. Fixed Focal-Length Lenses The camera will select the center focus point and the auto AF finetuning dialog will be displayed.
3 Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus. • If you are using a zoom lens, rotate the zoom ring all the way to select either the maximum angle or maximum zoom before focusing. • Before focusing, mount the camera on a tripod and aim the camera at a flat, high-contrast subject parallel to the camera focal plane. • Auto AF fine-tuning works best at maximum aperture. Zoom in on the view through the lens to confirm that the subject is in focus. Focus can be adjusted manually if necessary.
4 Press J. • The AF fine-tuning value for the current lens will be added to the [List saved values] list (CPU lenses only). • If auto fine-tuning is successful, [AF fine-tune on/off] item will be set to [On], enabling AF finetuning. Zoom Lenses After completing AF fine-tuning for either the maximum angle or maximum zoom, you will need to repeat the process for the remaining item. Press the X button, select [Overwrite value for existing lens], and repeat Steps 2 to 4. 5 Press J to save changes and exit.
D If Auto Fine-Tuning Fails If auto fine-tuning fails, a message will be displayed. Press X to attempt auto fine-tuning again, or press J to exit without performing AF finetuning. Pressing X returns you to Step 2. D Previously-Saved Lenses If a fine-tuning value exists for the current lens, you can choose to overwrite the existing value or save the new value separately in Step 2. Non-CPU Lens Data G button U B setup menu Record data for non-CPU lenses.
Clean Image Sensor G button U B setup menu Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the low-pass filter covering the image sensor and affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option vibrates the sensor to remove dust. Option [Clean now] [Clean at startup/ shutdown] Description Perform image sensor cleaning immediately. • [Clean at startup]: The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on.
Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning G button U B setup menu Use [Lock mirror up for cleaning] to lock the mirror up so that dust that cannot be removed using the “clean image sensor” option can be removed manually. For more information, see “Manual Cleaning” (0 1078). Image Dust Off Ref Photo G button U B setup menu Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in NX Studio. Image Dust Off processes NEF (RAW) pictures to mitigate effects caused by dust adhering in front of the camera image sensor.
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data 1 Choose a start option. • Highlight [Start] and press J to immediately display the [Image Dust Off ref photo] dialog. • Highlight [Clean sensor and then start] and press J to clean the image sensor before starting. The [Image Dust Off ref photo] dialog will be displayed when image sensor cleaning is complete. • “F” will appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays. • To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off reference data, press G.
2 With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the display and then press the shutter-release button halfway. • In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity. • In manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually. 3 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data. • The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
D Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select [Clean sensor and then start] only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be used with existing photographs. D Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data • • • • • • • [Image Dust Off ref photo] is not available when a non-CPU lens is mounted on the camera.
Pixel Mapping G button U B setup menu Pixel mapping checks and optimizes the camera image sensor. If you notice unexpected bright spots appearing in pictures taken with the camera, perform pixel mapping as described below. • Use a fully-charged battery to prevent unexpected loss of power. • Attach the lens cap (front cap) and close the eyepiece shutter before performing pixel mapping. 1 Select [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.
D Pixel Mapping • Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in progress. Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source. • Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera’s internal temperature is elevated. Image Comment G button U B setup menu Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed in the NX Studio [Info] tab. Input Comment Input a comment up to 36 characters long.
Attach Comment To attach the comment to subsequent photographs, highlight [Attach comment], press 2, and confirm that a check (M) appears in the adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit; the comment will be attached to all subsequent photographs. D Photo Info • Comments can be viewed on the [Other shooting data] page in the photo information display.
Artist/Copyright Enter a photographer name up to 36 characters long and a copyright holder name up to 54 characters long. Highlight [Artist] or [Copyright] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information on text entry, see “Text Entry” (0 86). Attach Copyright Information To attach copyright information to subsequent photographs, highlight [Attach copyright information], press 2, and confirm that a check (M) appears in the adjacent check box.
D Viewing Copyright Information • Copyright information can be viewed on the [Copyright info] page of the camera photo information display. • To display the [Copyright info] page, select (M) both [Shooting data] and [Copyright info] for [Playback display options] in the playback menu. IPTC G button U B setup menu IPTC presets can be created or edited on the camera and embedded in new photographs as described below. • You can also load IPTC presets created on a computer.
Renaming, Editing, and Copying Presets Highlight [Edit/save] and press 2 to display the [Select preset to edit or save] list of existing presets. • To edit or rename a preset, highlight it and press 2. To create a new preset, highlight [Unused] and press 2. - [Rename]: Rename the preset. - [Edit IPTC information]: Display the selected preset (0 918). Selected fields can be edited as desired. • To copy a preset, highlight it and press X. Highlight the destination, press J, and name the copy.
Embedding Presets Highlighting [Auto embed during shooting] and pressing 2 displays a list of presets. Highlight a preset and press J; the selected preset will be embedded in all subsequent photographs. To disable embedding, select [Off]. D Viewing IPTC Data • Embedded presets can be viewed on the [IPTC data] page of the camera photo information display. • To display the [IPTC data] page, select (M) both [Shooting data] and [IPTC data] for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
Copying Presets to the Camera The camera can store up to ten presets; to copy IPTC presets from a memory card to a selected destination on the camera, choose [Load/save], select [Slot 1] or [Slot 2], then highlight [Copy to camera] and press 2. • Highlight a preset and press J to proceed to the [Select destination] list. To preview the highlighted preset, press W/M instead of pressing J. After previewing the preset, press J to proceed to the [Select destination] list.
D IPTC Information • The camera supports standard roman alphanumeric characters only. Other characters will not display correctly except on a computer. • Preset names (0 915) may be up to 18 characters long. If a preset with a longer name is created using a computer, all characters after the eighteenth will be deleted. • The number of characters that may appear in each field is given below. Any characters over the limit will be deleted.
A IPTC IPTC is a standard established by the International Press Telecommunications Council (IPTC) with the intent of clarifying and simplifying the information required when photographs are shared with a variety of publications. A IPTC Preset Manager IPTC presets can be created on a computer and saved to memory cards using IPTC Preset Manager software. IPTC Preset Manager can be downloaded free of charge from the URL below. Instructions on use are available via online help. https://downloadcenter.
Voice Memo Options G button U B setup menu Adjust settings for voice memos (0 436). Voice Memo Choose whether voice memos are recorded manually or automatically after a photograph is taken. Option Description Voice memos cannot be recorded in shooting 7 [Off] mode. Voice memos are recorded automatically when shooting ends. [On (Auto and • Selecting [On (Auto and manual)] displays an 8 manual)] [Auto] menu where you can select the recording time.
Voice Memo Overwrite Choose whether the voice memo for the most recent photograph can be overwritten in shooting mode. Option Description Voice memos cannot be recorded in shooting mode if one [Disable] already exists for most recent photograph. Each new voice memo overwrites the memo for the most [Enable] recent photograph, if any. Voice Memo Control Choose how the Fn3 (C) button behaves when used to record voice memos.
Audio Output Choose the device used for voice memo playback. Option Description Voice memos are played back over headphones (if connected) or the [Speaker/ camera’s built-in % headphones] speaker. • Press 1 or 3 to choose a volume between [1] and [15]. • Press J to save changes and exit. Voice memos are output to the HDMI terminal at a & [HDMI] fixed volume. Voice memos cannot be played even using the Fn3 (C) button.
Beep Options G button U B setup menu Beep On/Off Turn the beep speaker on or off.
Volume Adjust beep volume. Pitch Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low]. Touch Controls G button U B setup menu Adjust settings for monitor touch controls. Enable/Disable Touch Controls Enable or disable touch controls. Select [Playback only] to enable touch controls in playback mode only. Glove Mode Selecting [Enabled] raises the sensitivity of the touch screen, making it easier to use while wearing gloves.
HDMI G button U B setup menu Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0 453). Location Data (Built-In) G button U B setup menu Adjust settings for use with the camera’s built-in GNSS receiver. For more information, see “Location Data” (0 384). Wireless Remote (WR) Options G button U B setup menu Adjust status LED and link mode settings for optional WR-R10 wireless remote controllers.
LED Lamp Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller. Link Mode Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same mode is selected for the other devices.
Option [PIN] • Description Communication is shared among all devices with the same four-digit PIN. You can enter any four-digit PIN of your choice. • Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J to enter and display the selected PIN. • This option is a good choice for photography featuring a large number of remote devices.
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button G button U B setup menu Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless remote controllers equipped with an Fn button. See Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] for more information. Option A [AF-ON] F [AF lock only] [AE lock (Reset on D release)] C [AE lock only] B [AE/AF lock] r [FV lock] Option [N Disable/ enable] [Preview] [+ NEF (RAW)] [Live view] * [Recall shooting o functions] [None] h q 4 a * Performs the same function as the camera a button.
Airplane Mode G button U B setup menu Select [Enable] to disable the camera’s built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions. • The wireless functions of optional peripheral devices connected to the camera can only be disabled by disconnecting the devices. Connect to Smart Device G button U B setup menu Connect to smartphones or tablets (smart devices) via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi.
Pairing (Bluetooth) Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth. Option [Start pairing] [Paired devices] [Bluetooth connection] Description Pair the camera with a smart device (0 469). List paired smart devices. To connect, select a device from the list. Select [Enable] to enable Bluetooth. Select to Send (Bluetooth) Select pictures for upload to a smart device. You can also opt to upload pictures as they are taken. Option Description Select [On] to mark pictures for upload as they are taken.
Wi-Fi Connection Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi. ❚❚ Establish Wi-Fi Connection Initiate a Wi-Fi connection to a smart device. • The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect, select the camera SSID on the smart device and enter the password (0 461). • Once a connection is established, this option will change to [Close Wi-Fi connection]. • Use [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when desired.
Send While Off If [On] is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected via Bluetooth will continue even when the camera is off. Location Data (Smart Device) Display latitude, longitude, altitude, and UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) data downloaded from a smart device. Connect to PC (Built-in Wi-Fi) G button U B setup menu Connect to computers via Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi Connection Select [Enable] to connect using the settings currently selected for [Network settings].
Network Settings Select [Create profile] to create a new network profile (0 488, 494). • If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to select a profile from a list. • To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2. Option Description [Profile name]: Rename the profile. The default profile name is the same as the network SSID. • [Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a password be entered before the profile can be changed. To change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
Option Description Infrastructure mode: Adjust settings for connection to a network via a router. - [SSID]: Enter the network SSID. - [Channel]: Selected automatically. - [Authentication/encryption]: Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-PSK-AES]. - [Password]: Enter the network password. • Access-point mode: Adjust settings for direct wireless connection to the camera. - [SSID]: Choose the camera SSID. - [Channel]: Choose [Auto] or [Manual]. - [Authentication/encryption]: Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-PSK-AES].
Options Adjust upload settings. ❚❚ Auto Send Select [On] to upload new photos as they are taken. • Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card. Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. • Movies and photos taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display (0 504). ❚❚ Delete After Send Select [Yes] to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is complete.
❚❚ Send File As When uploading NEF + JPEG images, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy. • When [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu, the option chosen for [Send file as] applies only to photos uploaded automatically by selecting [On] for [Auto send].
Wired LAN/WT G button U B setup menu Adjust settings for upload to a computer or ftp server connected via an Ethernet cable or optional WT-6 wireless transmitter. Wired LAN/WT Functions Select [Enable] to enable connection via Ethernet or a wireless transmitter. The camera’s built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi turn off. Choose Hardware Choose the connection type: Ethernet (“wired LAN”) or wireless LAN.
Network Settings Display the network profiles list, where you can create new profiles or select an existing profile. • Highlight a profile and press J to connect to the highlighted host computer or ftp server. • The camera can store up to nine network profiles. • To delete the highlighted profile, press O (Q). • To view information on the highlighted profile, press g (h/Q).
❚❚ Synchronize Date and Time Synchronize the clocks on two cameras connected via Ethernet. For more information, see “Synchronizing Camera Clocks” (0 633). ❚❚ Create Profile Create new network profiles. For more information, see “Creating a Network Profile (Ethernet)”(0 522) and “Creating Network Profiles (WT-6)”(0 544). Option [Connection wizard] Description Create a new profile with the help of a wizard. Enter [FTP upload] or [HTTP server] settings [Configure manually] manually.
❚❚ Copy to/from Card Use this option to share [FTP upload] and [HTTP server] profiles. • If there are two memory cards inserted in the camera, the card in the Slot 1 will be used for both “copy from” and “copy to” operations. Option [Copy profile from card] [Copy profile to card] Description Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card to the camera profile list. Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card. Highlight a profile and press J to copy it to the memory card.
D Editing Profiles If the shutter-release button is pressed while menus are displayed, the monitor will turn off. Any changes to the current profile will be lost. [General] Edit the profile name and enable or disable password protection. ● Option [Profile name] [Password protection] Description Edit the profile name. Enable password protection to prevent others from viewing network settings.
Option [Channel] [Authentication] [Encryption] 942 Description Choose a channel ([Access point] mode only). If [Infrastructure] is selected, the channel will be chosen automatically. Choose from [OPEN] (open system), [Shared] (shared key), [WPA-PSK], and [WPA2-PSK]. [Shared] and [WPA-PSK] are available only when [Infrastructure] is selected for [Communication mode]. Choose the type of encryption used on the network.
Option [Key index] Description If [Infrastructure] is selected for [Communication mode] and [WEP: 64-bit, base 16], [WEP: 64-bit, ASCII], [WEP: 128-bit, base 16], or [WEP: 128-bit, ASCII] is selected for [Encryption], choose a key index matching that used by the access point or host computer.
● [TCP/IP] Enter TCP/IP information. Option Description Choose whether the camera obtains the IP address and sub-net mask automatically or via manual entry. A TCP/ IP address is required in either case. • Select [Enable] to use an IP address and sub-net [Obtain mask supplied by a DHCP server or automatic private automatically] IP addressing. • Select [Disable] to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-net mask ([Mask]) manually.
[FTP] Enter information for connection to an ftp server. ● Option [Server type] [PASV mode] [Anonymous login] [Proxy server] Description Choose the ftp server type and enter the URL or IP address, destination folder, and port number. An IP address is required. Select [Enable] to enable PASV mode. Select [Enable] for anonymous login. This option can only be used with servers that are configured for anonymous login. Select [Disable] to supply a user ID and password. Enable this option as required.
❚❚ Delete After Send Select [Yes] to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is complete. • Sequential file numbering is used when [Yes] is selected, regardless of the item selected for Custom Setting d9 [File number sequence]. • Files marked for transfer before you selected [Yes] are not deleted. • Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
❚❚ JPEG + JPEG Slot Selection Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with [JPEG Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu. ❚❚ Overwrite If Same Name Choose [Yes] to overwrite files with duplicate names during upload. Choose [No] to add numbers to the names of newly uploaded files as necessary to prevent existing files being overwritten. ❚❚ Protect If Marked to Send Select [Yes] to automatically protect files marked for upload.
❚❚ Send Folder Select folders for upload. All photos in the selected folders (including those already marked as “sent”) will be marked for upload. Movies cannot be uploaded using this option. They must instead be uploaded from the playback display. ❚❚ Deselect All? Remove transfer marking from all pictures. Upload of images with a “sending” icon will immediately be terminated. ❚❚ HTTP User Settings Enter a user name and password for connection to an http server (http server connections only).
❚❚ Power Saving Choose whether the camera prioritizes network speed or reduced power consumption. • [Prioritize network speed] ensures that LAN connections remain active even when data are not being exchanged with the server. Ethernet connections can use the high-speed 1000BASE-T standard. • [Prioritize power saving] limits Ethernet connections to 100BASE-TX. LAN connections are terminated automatically when data transfer ends. The camera network indicator will turn off.
Battery Info G button U B setup menu View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera. Option [Charge] [No. of shots] Description The current battery level, expressed as a percentage. The number of times the shutter has been released since the battery was last charged. An indicator of whether the battery requires calibration. Calibration ensures the accuracy of the battery level display; after the battery has been charged a certain [Calibration] number of times, [j] will be displayed.
D Number of Shots [No. of shots] shows the number of times the shutter has been released. Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset white balance. D Charging Batteries at Low Temperatures Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures.
Save/Load Menu Settings G button U B setup menu Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can also load saved settings, allowing menu settings to be shared among cameras of the same model. • If two memory cards are inserted, the settings will be saved to the card in Slot 1.
Settings that can be saved and loaded [Photo shooting menu bank] [Extended photo menu banks] [File naming] [Role played by card in Slot 2] [Image area] [Image quality] [Image size] [NEF (RAW) recording] [ISO sensitivity settings] [White balance] [Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are PHOTO saved as [Auto]) SHOOTING MENU [Color space] [Active D-Lighting] [Long exposure NR] [High ISO NR] [Vignette control] [Diffraction compensation] [Auto distortion control] [Flicker reduction] [Flash control] [Au
Settings that can be saved and loaded [File naming] [Destination] [Image area] [Frame size/frame rate] [Movie quality] [Movie file type] [ISO sensitivity settings] [White balance] [Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are saved as [Auto]) MOVIE [Active D-Lighting] SHOOTING MENU [High ISO NR] [Diffraction compensation] [Flicker reduction] [Electronic VR] [Microphone sensitivity] [Attenuator] [Frequency response] [Wind noise reduction] [Headphone volume] [Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin]) 954
Settings that can be saved and loaded CUSTOM All items SETTING MENU [Language] [Time zone and date] (excepting [Date and time]) [Information display] [Non-CPU lens data] [Clean image sensor] [Image comment] [Copyright information] [IPTC] SETUP MENU [Voice memo options] [Beep options] [Touch controls] [HDMI] [Location data (built-in)] ([Standby timer] and [Set clock from satellite] only) [Wireless remote (WR) options] [Assign remote (WR) Fn button] [Slot empty release lock] The current contents of “My Menu”
Save Menu Settings Save settings to a memory card. If the card is full, an error will be displayed and settings will not be saved. Saved settings can only be used with other cameras of the same model. Load Menu Settings Load saved settings from a memory card. Note that [Load menu settings] is available only when a memory card containing saved settings is inserted. D Saved Settings Settings are saved to files named “NCSET***”. “***” is an identifier that varies from camera to camera.
Reset All Settings G button U B setup menu Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date] to their default values. Copyright information and other usergenerated entries are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored. We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load menu settings] item in the setup menu before performing a reset. Firmware Version G button U B setup menu View the current camera firmware version.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies To view the retouch menu, select the N tab in the camera menus. The items in the retouch menu are used to trim or retouch existing pictures. • The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing pictures is inserted in the camera. • Retouched copies are saved to new files, separate from the original pictures.
Creating Retouched Copies 1 Select an item in the retouch menu. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2 to select. 2 Select a picture. • Highlight a picture using the multi selector. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. • To view pictures in other locations, press W (M) and choose the desired card and folder in the [Choose slot and folder] dialog. • Press J to select the highlighted picture.
3 Select retouch options. • • For more information, see the section for the selected item. To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G. The retouch menu will be displayed. 4 Create a retouched copy. • • Press J to create a retouched copy. Retouched copies are indicated by a p icon. D Retouching the Current Picture To create a retouched copy of the current picture, press i and select [Retouch], or hold J and press 2.
D Retouching Copies • Most items can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although multiple edits may result in reduced image quality or faded colors. • With the exception of [Trim movie], each item can be applied only once. • Some items may be unavailable depending on the items used to create the copy. • Items that cannot be applied to the current picture are grayed out and unavailable.
NEF (RAW) Processing: Converting NEF (RAW) to JPEG G button U N retouch menu “NEF (RAW) processing” is used to save NEF (RAW) pictures in other formats, such as JPEG. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) pictures can be created on the camera as described below. 1 Select [NEF (RAW) processing] in the retouch menu. Highlight [NEF (RAW) processing] and press 2. 2 Choose a destination. • If two memory cards are inserted, highlight [Choose destination] and press 2.
3 Choose how pictures are selected. Option [Select image(s)] [Select date] [Select folder] Description Create JPEG copies of selected NEF (RAW) pictures. Multiple NEF (RAW) pictures can be selected. Create JPEG copies of all NEF (RAW) pictures taken on selected dates. Create JPEG copies of all NEF (RAW) pictures in a selected folder. If you chose [Select image(s)], proceed to Step 5. 4 Select the source slot. • Highlight the slot with the card containing the NEF (RAW) pictures and press 2.
5 Select photographs. If you chose [Select image(s)]: • Highlight pictures using the multi selector. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. • To select the highlighted picture, press the center of the multi selector. Selected pictures are indicated by a L icon. To deselect the current picture, press the center of the multi selector again; the L will no longer be displayed. All pictures will be processed using the same settings.
If you chose [Select folder]: Highlight a folder and press J to select; all pictures in the selected folder will be processed using the same settings. 6 Choose settings for the JPEG copies. • The settings in effect when the photograph was taken appear below a preview. • To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken, if applicable, select [Original].
7 Copy the photographs. • Highlight [EXE] and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photographs. • If multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be displayed after you highlight [EXE] and press J; highlight [Yes] and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos. • To exit without copying the photographs, press the G button. D NEF (RAW) Processing • NEF (RAW) processing is available only with NEF (RAW) pictures created with this camera.
Trim G button U N retouch menu Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below. To Size the crop Change the crop aspect ratio Position the crop Save the crop Description Press X or W (M) to choose the crop size. Rotate the main command dial to choose the aspect ratio. Use the multi selector to position the crop. Press J to save the current crop as a separate file.
Resize G button U N retouch menu Create small copies of selected photographs. If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose the card used to store the resized copies. Resizing Multiple Pictures If you accessed the retouch menu via the G button, you can resize multiple selected pictures. 1 Select [Resize] in the retouch menu. Highlight [Resize] and press 2. 2 Choose a destination. • If two memory cards are inserted, highlight [Choose destination] and press 2.
• Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J. 3 Choose a size. • Highlight [Choose size] and press 2. • Highlight the desired size (length in pixels) using 1 and 3 and press J.
4 Choose how pictures are selected. Option Description Resize selected pictures. [Select Multiple pictures can be image(s)] selected. Resize all pictures taken on [Select date] selected dates. [Select Resize all pictures in a folder] selected folder. If you chose [Select image(s)], proceed to Step 6. 5 Select the source slot. • Highlight the slot with the card containing the desired pictures and press 2. • You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
6 Select pictures. If you chose [Select image(s)]: • Highlight pictures using the multi selector. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. • To select the highlighted picture, press the center of the multi selector. Selected pictures are indicated by a 8 icon. To deselect the current picture, press the center of the multi selector again; the 8 will no longer be displayed. The selected pictures will all be copied at the size selected in Step 3.
If you chose [Select folder]: Highlight a folder and press J to select; all pictures in the selected folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 3. • 7 Save the resized copies. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J to save the resized copies. D Resize Depending on the copy size, playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
D-Lighting G button U N retouch menu D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit photographs. Before After The edit display shows before and after images. • Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. • Press J to save the retouched copy.
Red-Eye Correction G button U N retouch menu Correct “red-eye” caused by light from the flash reflecting from the retinas of portrait subjects. • Red-eye correction is available only with photographs taken using a flash. • Red-eye that cannot be detected by the camera will not be corrected. • Press J to save the retouched copy. D Red-Eye Correction • Note the following: - Red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results.
Straighten G button U N retouch menu Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in increments of approximately 0.25°. • The effect can be previewed in the edit display. • The greater the rotation, the more will be trimmed from the edges. • Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of straightening performed. • Press J to save the retouched copy.
Distortion Control G button U N retouch menu Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion, reducing barrel distortion in pictures taken with wide-angle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in pictures taken with telephoto lenses. Select [Auto] to apply automatic distortion control before making fine adjustments with the multi selector. Select [Manual] to reduce distortion manually. • The effect can be previewed in the edit display. • [Auto] is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses.
D Distortion Control • Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out. • Distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than [DX (24×16)].
Perspective Control G button U N retouch menu Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective in photos taken looking up from the base of a tall object. • The effect can be previewed in the edit display. • Note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out. • Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to adjust perspective. • Press J to save the retouched copy.
Monochrome G button U N retouch menu Copy photographs in monochrome. [Monochrome] gives you a choice of the following monochrome tints: Option Description [Black-and-white] Copy photographs in black-and-white. [Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia. Copy photographs in blue-and-white [Cyanotype] monochrome. • The effect can be previewed in the edit display. • In the case of [Sepia] or [Cyanotype], color saturation can be adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1 to increase, 3 to decrease.
Image Overlay G button U N retouch menu Image overlay combines existing photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals. One NEF (RAW) image can be overlaid on another using additive blending ([Add]), or multiple images can be combined using [Lighten] or [Darken]. Add Overlay two NEF (RAW) pictures to create a single new JPEG copy. 1 Select [Image overlay] in the retouch menu. Highlight [Image overlay] and press 2.
2 Select [Add]. Highlight [Add] and press 2 to display image overlay options with [Image 1] highlighted. 3 Highlight the first image. • Press J to display a pictureselection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images, where you can use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. • To view pictures in other locations, press W (M) and choose the desired card and folder in the [Choose slot and folder] dialog.
4 Select the first picture. Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display with the selected picture listed under [Image 1]. 5 Select the second picture. Press 2 and select [Image 2], then select the second photo as described in Steps 3 and 4. 6 Adjust gain. • The overlay of [Image 1] and [Image 2] can be previewed in the “Preview” column. Highlight [Image 1] or [Image 2] and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to adjust gain.
7 Select the “Preview” column. Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the “Preview” column. • To proceed without previewing the overlay, highlight [Save] and press J. • 8 Preview the overlay. • To preview the overlay, highlight [Overlay] and press J. • To select new photos or adjust gain, press W (M). You will be returned to Step 6. 9 Save the overlay. To save the overlay and display the resulting image, press J while the preview is displayed.
D [Add] • Colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final picture. The overlay will include only NEF (RAW) pictures created with this camera. Pictures created with other cameras or in other formats cannot be selected. • The overlay is saved at an [Image quality] of [JPEG fine c].
Lighten and Darken The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects only the brightest or darkest pixels at each point in the image to create a single new JPEG copy. 1 Select [Lighten] or [Darken]. After selecting [Image overlay] in the retouch menu, highlight either [Lighten] or [Darken] and press 2. • Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the brightest. • Darken: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the darkest.
2 Choose how pictures are selected. Option [Select individual images] Description Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one. Select two pictures; the overlay will include [Select consecutive the two pictures and all images between images] them. The overlay will include all pictures in the [Select folder] selected folder. 3 Select the source slot. • Highlight the slot with the card containing the desired pictures and press 2.
4 Select pictures. If you chose [Select individual images]: • Highlight pictures using the multi selector. • To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button. • To select the highlighted picture, press the center of the multi selector. Selected pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the highlighted picture, press the center of the multi selector again; the $ icon will no longer be displayed. The selected pictures will be combined using the option selected in Step 1.
If you chose [Select consecutive images]: All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will be combined using the option selected in Step 1. - Use the center of the multi selector to select the first and last pictures in the desired range. - The first and last pictures are indicated by % icons and the pictures between them by $ icons. - You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to highlight different pictures to serve as the first or last frame.
D [Lighten]/[Darken] • • • • • • The overlay will include only pictures created with this camera. Pictures created with other cameras cannot be selected. The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options selected for [Image area] > [Choose image area]. Overlays that include pictures taken at different image quality settings will be saved at the same setting as the image with the highest image quality.
O My Menu/m Recent Settings To view [MY MENU], select the O tab in the camera menus. O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20 items from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. Items can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
❚❚ Adding Items to My Menu 1 Select [Add items] in [O MY MENU]. Highlight [Add items] and press 2. 2 Select a menu. Highlight the name of the menu containing the item you wish to add and press 2. 3 Select an item. Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
4 Position the new item. Press 1 or 3 to position the new item and press J to add it to My Menu. 5 Add more items. • The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark (L). • Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected. • Repeat Steps 1–4 to select additional items.
❚❚ Removing Items from My Menu 1 Select [Remove items] in [O MY MENU]. Highlight [Remove items] and press 2. 2 Select items. Highlight items and press 2 to select (M) or deselect. • Continue until all the items you wish to remove are selected (L). • 3 Remove the selected items. Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J again to remove the selected items.
❚❚ Reordering Items in My Menu 1 Select [Rank items] in [O MY MENU]. Highlight [Rank items] and press 2. 2 Select an item. Highlight the item you wish to move and press J. 3 Position the item. Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press J. • Repeat Steps 2–3 to reposition additional items.
4 Exit to [O MY MENU]. Press the G button to return to [O MY MENU].
❚❚ Displaying [RECENT SETTINGS] 1 Select [Choose tab] in [O MY MENU]. Highlight [Choose tab] and press 2. 2 Select [m RECENT SETTINGS]. • Highlight [mRECENT SETTINGS] in the [Choose tab] menu and press J. • The name of the menu will change from [MY MENU] to [RECENT SETTINGS].
m Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used Settings ❚❚ How Items Are Added to [RECENT SETTINGS] Menu items are added to the top of the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu as they are used. The twenty most recently settings are listed. D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and press the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O (Q) again to remove the selected item.
Troubleshooting Before Contacting Customer Support You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the steps below. Check this list before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative. 998 STEP 1 Check the common problems listed in the following sections: • “Problems and Solutions” (0 1000) • “Alerts and Error Messages” (0 1012) STEP 2 Turn the camera off and remove the battery, then wait about a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera on.
D Restoring Default Settings • Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features may be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings using the [Reset all settings] item in the setup menu. • Note, however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
Problems and Solutions Solutions to some common issues are listed below. Battery/Display The camera is on but does not respond: • Wait for recording and other operations to end. • If the problem persists, turn the camera off. • If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery. • If you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. - Any data currently being recorded will be lost.
The viewfinder is dark: Is the battery charged? The viewfinder may dim if the battery is exhausted or not inserted (0 28, 47). ● The display in the viewfinder, control panel, or monitor turns off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer] or c4 [Monitor off delay]. ● The display in control panel or viewfinder is dim and unresponsive: The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
Shooting The camera takes time to turn on: More time will be needed to find files if the memory card contains large numbers of files or folders. ● The shutter cannot be released: • Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available? • When a CPU lens of a type other than G or E is attached, the shutter cannot be released unless the aperture ring is locked at minimum aperture (the highest f-number).
Photos are out of focus: • Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, rotate the focus-mode selector to AF. • Autofocus does not perform well under the following conditions. In these cases, use manual focus or focus lock.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway: If AF-C is selected for autofocus mode, focus can be locked by pressing the center of the sub-selector. ● Focus-point selection is not available: • Is the focus selector lock in the L (lock) position? • Focus-point selection is not available when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode. • Focus point selection is not available in playback mode or when menus are in use.
● “Noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appears in photos: • To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or Active D-Lighting. • At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is elevated.
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview shown in the monitor during live view: Changes to monitor brightness during live view have no effect on images recorded with the camera. ● Flicker or banding appears in the display during movie recording: Select [Flicker reduction] in the movie shooting menu and choose an option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply.
“Noise” (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appears during live view: • Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a result of increases in the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during live view. Exit live view when the camera is not in use. • Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may appear if you press the X button to zoom in on the view through the lens during live view.
White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable: • White balance bracketing is not available when an NEF (RAW) or NEF + JPEG option is selected for image quality. • White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and HDR modes. ● The effects of [Set Picture Control] differ from image to image: [Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a custom Picture Control created using [Manage Picture Control], or [A] (auto) is selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or [Saturation].
Playback NEF (RAW) pictures are not visible during playback: The camera displays only the JPEG copies of pictures taken with [NEF (RAW) + JPEG finec], [NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine], [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normalc], [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal], [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicc], or [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic] selected for [Image quality]. ● Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed: Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display correctly.
The Image Dust Off option in NX Studio does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter and will not have the desired effect if: • Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed are used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed • Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed are used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed ● The effects of [Set Pictur
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name): • Navigate to the setup menu and confirm both that [Disable] is selected for [Airplane mode] and that [Enable] is selected for [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection]. • Confirm that the [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] is enabled in the setup menu. • Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the smart device.
Alerts and Error Messages This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in the viewfinder, top control panel, and monitor. Alerts The following alerts appear in the top control panel and viewfinder: Alert Top control Viewfinder panel B (flashes) B (flashes) H d 1012 Alerts and Error Messages Problem/solution Lens aperture ring is not set to minimum aperture. Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture (highest f-number). Low battery. Ready spare battery.
Alert Top control Viewfinder panel H (flashes) d (flashes) B (flashes) — F F Problem/solution Battery exhausted. • Replace with spare battery. • Charge battery. Battery info not available. • Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikonauthorized service representative. • Battery level is extremely low; charge battery. Battery cannot supply data to camera. Replace third-party batteries with genuine Nikon batteries. High battery temperature. Remove battery and wait for it to cool. Camera clock is not set.
Alert Top Problem/solution control Viewfinder panel Camera unable to focus using autofocus. FH — (flashes) Change composition or focus manually. A (Bulb) selected in mode S. A A • Change shutter speed. (flashes) (flashes) • Select mode M. % (Time) selected in mode S. % % • Change shutter speed. (flashes) (flashes) • Select mode M. Processing in progress. 1 k (flashes) (flashes) Wait for processing to complete. Flash has fired at full power. Photo may be underexposed.
Alert Top control Viewfinder panel Problem/solution Subject too bright; limits of camera exposure metering system exceeded. • Lower ISO sensitivity. • Mode P: Use third-party ND (neutral density) filter (filter can also be used if alert is still displayed after following settings are adjusted in mode S or A). • Mode S: Choose faster shutter speed. (Exposure indicators • Mode A: Choose smaller aperture (higher fnumber).
Alert Top control Viewfinder panel Y (flashes) — n (flashes) j (flashes) O (flashes) O (flashes) 1016 Alerts and Error Messages Problem/solution Flash unit that does not support red-eye reduction attached and flash mode set to redeye reduction or red-eye reduction with slow sync. • Use flash unit that supports red-eye reduction. • Change flash mode. Memory insufficient to record further photos. • Delete pictures from memory card until there is room for additional pictures to be recorded.
Error Messages The following alerts appear in the monitor and top control panel: Alert Monitor No memory card. Cannot access this memory card. Insert another card. Top control panel Problem/solution Memory card not inserted or inserted incorrectly. Check that card is inserted correctly. Error accessing memory card. • Check that camera supports memory card. • If error persists after card has been repeatedly ejected and reinserted, card may be damaged.
Alert Monitor Top control panel Problem/solution Memory card is not correctly formatted. This card is not formatted. T • Format memory card. Format the (flashes) • Replace with correctly-formatted memory card. card. Unable to start Camera’s internal temperature is live view. Please — elevated. wait. Suspend shooting until camera has cooled. Folder contains no pictures. Insert memory card that contains pictures. Folder contains No pictures in folder selected for — no images. playback.
Alert Monitor Top control panel Cannot display this file. — Cannot select this file. — This movie cannot be edited. — Problem/solution File has been modified using computer application or does not conform to DCF file standard. Do not overwrite images using computer applications. File is corrupt. Do not overwrite images using computer applications. Selected picture cannot be retouched. Retouch options are available only with pictures taken with or previously retouched on camera.
Alert Monitor This file cannot be saved to the destination memory card. See the camera's user's manual for details. Top control panel — 1020 Alerts and Error Messages Problem/solution Files 4 GB or larger can only be saved to memory cards formatted for exFAT. They cannot be saved to cards formatted for other file systems, such as FAT32. Use a memory card with a capacity over 32 GB formatted in the camera or keep file size to under 4 GB.
Technical Notes Camera Displays For illustrative purposes, the displays are shown with all indicators lit.
1 Displayed by pressing button to which [Viewfinder virtual horizon] has been assigned using Custom Setting f3 ([Custom controls]; 0 850). 2 Functions as a pitch indicator when the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation. 3 Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d11 [Framing grid display]. 4 Displayed only when a lens with a built-in teleconverter is attached and the teleconverter is in use.
1 2 3 4 1 Exposure indicator Exposure (0 190) 2 3 Exposure compensation (0 117, 199) Exposure and flash bracketing progress indicator (0 251) Flash compensation indicator (0 133, 653) Exposure compensation indicator (0 117, 199) 4 Bracketing indicator Exposure and flash bracketing (0 251) WB bracketing (0 259) ADL bracketing (0 265) Camera Displays 1023
1 2 3 45 18 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 7 8 9 16 Focus indicator (0 50, 176) Metering (0 111, 178) Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 170, 196) Exposure mode (0 108, 182) Shutter speed lock icon (0 194) Shutter speed (0 185, 188) Autofocus mode (0 98, 149) Aperture lock icon (0 194) Aperture (f-number; 0 186, 188) Aperture (number of stops; 0 187) 1024 Camera Displays 10 11 12 1314 15 9 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 114, 213) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 116, 220) 10 ISO sensitivity (0 114, 213) Active D-Light
12 Number of exposures remaining (0 48, 1120) Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills (0 207, 1120) Preset white balance recording indicator (0 235) Exposure compensation value (0 117, 199) Flash compensation value (0 133, 653) PC mode indicator (0 1071) 13 “k” (appears when memory 14 15 16 17 18 remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 48) Flash-ready indicator * (0 641) Low battery warning (0 47) Aperture stop indicator (0 187) Flash sync indicator (0 836) FV lock indicator (0 655, 840) * Displ
The Information Display 1 234 5 13 12 1 Exposure mode (0 108, 182) 2 Flexible program indicator (0 184) 3 Shutter speed lock icon (0 194) 4 Flash sync indicator (0 836) 5 Shutter speed (0 185, 188) 6 Aperture stop indicator (0 187) 7 Aperture lock icon (0 194) 8 Aperture (f-number; 0 186, 9 188) Aperture (number of stops; 0 187) Exposure and flash bracketing indicator (0 251) WB bracketing indicator (0 259) ADL bracketing indicator (0 265) HDR indicator (0 283) Multiple exposure indicator (0 318) 1026
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 20 19 18 17 16 14 15 1 Bluetooth connection indicator (0 469, 929) Airplane mode (0 929) 2 Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 461, 931, 932) 3 Track log indicator (0 384) 4 Satellite signal indicator (0 386) 5 Long exposure noise reduction indicator (0 767) 6 Vignette control indicator (0 769) 7 Electronic front-curtain shutter (0 827) 8 Exposure delay mode (0 827) 9 Interval timer indicator (0 331) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Flash control mode (0 645) FP indicator (0 836) “
D The ! Icon A flashing ! icon indicates that the camera clock has been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] option in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. A Using the i Menu To access the i menu, press the i button or tap the guide in the information display. Press the i button again or press the R button to return to the information display when settings are complete.
Live View (Still Photography/Movies) ❚❚ Still Photography 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 13 41 40 39 38 14 15 16 37 36 35 34 17 18 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 1 Exposure mode (0 108, 182) 2 Flexible program indicator (0 184) 3 “No memory card” indicator 4 Subject tracking AF (0 160) 5 Focus point (0 164) 6 Autofocus mode (0 98, 151) 7 AF-area mode (0 101, 160) 8 Active D-Lighting (0 281) 9 Picture Control (0 125, 271) 10 Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 461, 931, 932) 11 White balance (0 121,
13 Image area (0 136) 14 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator (0 251) 15 16 17 18 19 20 WB bracketing indicator (0 259) ADL bracketing indicator (0 265) HDR indicator (0 283) Multiple exposure indicator (0 318) Position of current frame in exposure/flash bracketing sequence (0 251) Position of current frame in white balance bracketing sequence (0 259) ADL bracketing amount (0 265) HDR exposure differential (0 283) Number of exposures (multiple exposure; 0 318) i icon (0 88) Exposure indicator (0 190)
39 Touch shooting (0 18) 40 Photo live view display WB (0 848) 41 Time remaining (0 60) Temperature warning (0 1031) D Temperature Warnings • If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning and count-down timer will be displayed. When the timer reaches zero, the monitor will turn off. • The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some cases, the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on.
❚❚ Filming 1 2 3 4 5 12 11 10 9 6 7 8 1 Recording indicator (0 63) “No movie” indicator (0 297) 2 External recording control (0 455) 3 Frame size and rate/image quality (0 294) 4 Time remaining (0 294) 5 Time code (0 795) 6 Wind noise reduction (0 794) 1032 Camera Displays 7 Headphone volume (0 794) 8 Release mode (still photography; 0 70) 9 Sound level (0 66) 10 Microphone sensitivity (0 792) 11 Frequency response (0 793) 12 Electronic VR indicator (0 791)
The Top Control Panel 1 2 3 4 8 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 1 Shutter speed (0 185, 188) AF-area mode (0 101, 157) 2 Exposure compensation value (0 117, 199) Flash compensation value (0 133, 653) Number of shots in exposure and flash bracketing sequence (0 251) Number of shots in WB bracketing sequence (0 259) Overlay mode (0 328) Number of intervals for interval-timer photography (0 331) Focal length (non-CPU lenses; 0 383) Flexible program indicator (0 184) 3 Exposure mode (0 108, 182) 4 AF-area mode indicato
5 6 1 2 7 8 9 3 4 1 Shutter-speed lock icon (0 194) 2 Flash sync indicator (0 836) 3 Exposure indicator Exposure (0 190) 4 5 6 Aperture (f-number; 0 186, Exposure compensation (0 117, 199) Exposure and flash bracketing (0 251) WB bracketing (0 259) ADL bracketing (0 265) ISO sensitivity indicator (0 114, 213) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 116, 220) Aperture stop indicator (0 187) 7 8 9 1034 Camera Displays 188) Aperture (number of stops; 0 187) Bracketing increment (exposure and flash bracket
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 1 Bracketing indicator 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Exposure and flash bracketing (0 251) WB bracketing (0 259) ADL bracketing (0 265) Flash mode (0 131, 648) Metering (0 111, 178) Frame count (0 10) ISO sensitivity (0 114, 213) White balance preset number (0 234) Flash compensation indicator (0 133, 653) Multiple exposure indicator (0 321) Aperture lock icon (0 194) Exposure compensation indicator (0 117, 199) Clock battery indicator (0 46, 1083) 11 10 “k” (appears when memory remains for ov
The Rear Control Panel 1 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 1 Image size (NEF/RAW; 0 147) 2 3 4 5 Size for JPEG images recorded to card in Slot 2 (0 308) Release mode (0 109, 203) Voice memo status indicator (0 437, 441) Voice memo recording mode (0 440) Release mode (0 109, 203) Continuous shooting speed (0 109, 203, 824) Self-timer shot count/selftimer delay (0 209, 823) Number of exposures remaining (0 48, 1120) Frame count (0 833) Length of voice memo (0 437) Sub-option selected for [Auto] or [Fluorescent] white balan
Compatible F Mount Lenses CPU lenses are recommended (but note that IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used). Types G, E, and D, which grant access to a full range of camera features, are particularly recommended. CPU lenses Exposure mode Lens 1/accessory Autofocus 2 Metering L M 3DRGB N RGB P S A M 4 4 4 4 — — 46 46 46 — PC-E NIKKOR series 5 — 46 46 46 — PC Micro 85mm f/2.
1 2 3 4 5 IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used. M (manual focus) is available with all lenses. Vibration reduction (VR) is supported with VR lenses. [Spot metering] meters the selected focus point. Fog, lines, and other image artifacts (“noise”) may appear in photos taken with the electronic front-curtain shutter. This can be prevented by selecting [Disable] for Custom Setting d6 [Electronic front-curtain shutter]. 6 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting.
D Lens f-Number The f-number is a measure of lens “speed”, its maximum (widest) aperture. It appears at the end of the lens name, for example as “f/2.8” or “f/3.5–5.6”. D VR Lenses The lenses listed below are not recommended for long exposures or photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities, as due to the design of the vibration reduction (VR) control system the resulting photos may be marred by fog. • AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED • AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.
D Calculating Angle of View The camera can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If a 35 mm format lens or a lens that supports the FX format is attached, the angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35 mm film. • You can also take pictures at angles of view that differ from that of the current lens by selecting different options for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
D Cross Sensors The availability of cross-sensor focus points varies with the lens used.
D AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters and Available Focus Points When an AF-S or AF-I teleconverter is attached, the focus points shown in the illustrations can be used during viewfinder photography for autofocus and electronic rangefinding (note that at maximum combined apertures slower than f/5.6, the camera may not be able to focus on dark or low-contrast subjects). Teleconverter Max. lens aperture 1 TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III TC-17E II TC-20E, TC-20E II, TC-20E III f/2 TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III f/2.
Teleconverter TC-17E II TC-800-1.25E ED Max. lens aperture 1 Available focus points (cross-sensor focus points highlighted in gray 2) f/4 f/5.6 • • TC-20E, TC-20E II, TC-20E III f/4 TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III f/5.6 • • 23 focus points 9 cross sensors 15 focus points 1 cross sensor 1 At maximum zoom, in the case of zoom lenses. 2 Other focus points use line sensors, which detect horizontal lines. Autofocus is not available when teleconverters are used with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts (q). Type G lenses are marked with a “G”, type E lenses with an “E”, and type D lenses with a “D”. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring (w).
Non-CPU lenses and Other Accessories Exposure mode Lens 1/accessory AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses 2 Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4 Reflex-NIKKOR PC-NIKKOR AI-type Teleconverter 8 PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 9 Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11) 1 2 3 Metering P S A M L 3DRGB RGB M N t — 43 — 44 45 — — — — — — 46 43 47 43 4 10 — — — — — — — — 44 — — 45 4 45 4 — — — — — — 43 — — 4 — Some lenses cannot be used (0 1047).
4 Can be used only if the lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu. Some lenses may, however, fail to produce the desired results even if the focal length and maximum aperture are supplied. Use [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted metering] if the desired results are not achieved. 5 For improved precision, specify the lens focal length and maximum aperture using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
D Incompatible Lenses and Accessories The following non-CPU lenses and accessories cannot be used. Attempting to mount them on the camera could damage the camera or lens. • TC-16A AF teleconverters • Non-AI lenses (lenses with pre-AI exposure couplings) • Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11) • Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6) • 2.
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses • Specifying the lens focal length and maximum aperture using the [NonCPU lens data] item in the setup menu allows many of the features available with CPU lenses, including aperture value display and color matrix metering, to be used with non-CPU lenses. If the focal length and maximum aperture are not provided and [Matrix metering] is selected for metering, [Center-weighted metering] will be used instead. • Aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring.
The Electronic Rangefinder The conditions under which the electronic rangefinder can be used vary with the lens. ❚❚ CPU lenses Lens/accessory Type G, E, or D; AF-S, AF-P, AF-I PC NIKKOR 19mm f/4E ED PC-E NIKKOR series PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF) AI-P NIKKOR Viewfinder photography 4 41 41 41 4 Live view — — — — — 42 — 43 — 1 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting. 2 When an AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5– 4.
❚❚ Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories Lens/accessory AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4 Reflex-NIKKOR PC-NIKKOR AI-type Teleconverter PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11) Viewfinder photography Live view 41 — 4 — 42 43 43 — — — — — 43 — 1 With a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. 2 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting. 3 With a maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Compatible Flash Units The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a variety of features thanks to improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units.
Flash unit SB-R200 4 — — 45 — — — 4 — 4 4 — 4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 — 44 — — — — 4 4 — — — — — — — 4 4 4 4 4 — 4 — — 4 4 4 4 4 — 4 — — 46 46 — — — — — — — 4 4 4 4 4 — 4 — — 4 4 4 4 4 — — — — SB-300 — SB-400 4 SB-500 4 — 44 4 — — — 4 — 44 — — — — SU-800 4 4 SB-600 4 4 SB-700 1052 Compatible Flash Units SB-910/ SB-900/ SB-800 Remote Master Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting Remote flash control i-TTL i-TTL Quick wireless [A : B] flash control qA Auto apertu
Flash unit SB-300 SB-400 SU-800 SB-R200 SB-500 SB-600 SB-700 Radio-controlled Advanced 47 Wireless Lighting Color Information 4 Communication (flash) Color Information — Communication (LED light) 8 Auto FP high-speed sync 4 FV lock 9 4 Red-eye reduction 4 Camera modeling 4 illumination Unified flash control 4 Camera flash unit firmware 4 update SB-910/ SB-900/ SB-800 SB-5000 Supported features — — — — — — — — 4 4 — — — 4 — — — — 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 — — 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 — — 4 — 4 4 — — —
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Not available with spot metering. Can also be selected via the flash unit. qA/A mode selection is performed on the flash unit using custom settings. Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus. Available during close-up photography only. Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master flash. Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL. Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
❚❚ The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units. Group flash control is supported for up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash. D Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual modes. The options available do not vary with the lens used.
D Metering Areas for FV Lock The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional flash units are as follows: Picture taken with Flash control mode i-TTL Stand-alone flash unit Auto aperture (qA) Remote flash units controlled via Advanced Wireless Lighting i-TTL Auto aperture (qA) Non-TTL auto (A) Metered area 6-mm circle in center of frame Area metered by flash exposure meter Entire frame Area metered by flash exposure meter D Notes on Optional Flash Units • Refer to the flash unit manual for detaile
• At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. • In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below: 100 4 Maximum aperture (f-number) at ISO equivalent of: 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800 5 5.6 7.1 8 10 11 13 * If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
• During viewfinder photography, the focus points for which AF illumination is available vary with focal length.
• When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor. • In i-TTL, do not use any form of flash panel (diffusion panel) other than the flash unit’s built-in flash panel or bounce adapters provided with the flash unit. Using other panels may produce incorrect exposure.
Other Compatible Accessories A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera. ● Power Sources • EN-EL18c Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: EN-EL18c batteries can be used with Nikon D6 digital cameras. EN-EL18c batteries can be charged and calibrated using MH-26a battery chargers. - EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that fewer pictures can be taken on a single charge with an EN-EL18 than with an EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a (0 1125).
Accessory Shoe Covers BS-3/BS-1 Accessory Shoe Covers: Accessory shoe covers protect the accessory shoe when no flash unit is attached (0 1066). ● Body Caps BF-1B Body Cap/BF-1A Body Cap: Body caps prevent dust entering the camera when no lens is in place. ● Viewfinder Eyepiece Accessories DK-19 Rubber Eyecup: A rubber eyecup that can be fitted to the camera viewfinder. The DK-19 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• DK-17F Fluorine-Coated Finder Eyepiece: A DK-17F is supplied with the camera. The protective glass features Nikon’s unique, easy-to-clean fluorine coating on both surfaces. • DR-5 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment: The DR-5 attaches to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is used to take pictures in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
Wireless Transmitters 1, 2 WT-6 Wireless Transmitters: Use a wireless transmitter to upload pictures over a wireless network or control the camera from a computer running Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). You can also take and browse pictures remotely from a computer or smart device. 1 Requires a wireless network and some basic network knowledge. Be sure to update the wireless transmitter software to the latest version. 2 WT-5 wireless transmitters cannot be used.
● Remote Terminal Accessories The camera is equipped with a ten-pin remote terminal for remote control and automatic photography. Be sure to replace the terminal cap when the terminal is not in use. Dust or other foreign matter accumulating in the terminal contacts could cause the camera to malfunction. • MC-22/MC-22A Remote Cords (length approximately 1 m/3.
● USB Cables • UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for connection • to the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device. UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors. HDMI Cables HC-E1 HDMI Cable: An HDMI cable with a type C connector for connection to the camera and a type A connector for connection to HDMI devices. ● Microphones ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera microphone jack to record stereo sound.
D Compatible Accessories • • Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest information. D The BS-3 Accessory Shoe Cover The supplied accessory shoe cover can be used to protect the accessory shoe or to prevent light reflected from the metal parts of the shoe appearing in photographs. The cover slides into the shoe as shown. To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly, press the cover down with a thumb and slide it in the direction shown.
D Attaching Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses Remove the DK-17F viewfinder eyepiece before attaching a diopter-adjustment viewfinder lens. Press the latches on both sides of the eyepiece adapter simultaneously to release the eyepiece lock (q) and then unscrew the eyepiece as shown (w). D Removing the Eyepiece Adapter Press and lift the latches on both sides simultaneously (q) and remove the adapter as shown (w).
D The HDMI/USB Cable Clip To prevent accidental disconnection, attach the supplied clip to HDMI cables or to the supplied USB cable as shown (note that the clip may not fit all third-party HDMI cables). The illustrations show the USB cable.
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter. 1 Remove the BL-6 batterychamber cover. Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it to the open (A) position (q), and remove the BL-6 batterychamber cover (w). 2 Connect the EH-6c AC adapter to the EP-6 power connector. • Pass the DC cable over the power connector cable guide (q) and slide it down until it is at the bottom of the slot.
3 Insert the power connector. Fully insert the power connector into the battery chamber as shown. 4 Latch the power connector. • Rotate the latch to the closed position (q) and fold it down as shown (w). • To prevent the power connector being dislodged during operation, be sure that it is securely latched. • The battery level is not displayed in the top control panel while the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
Software The following Nikon software can be used with the camera: Computer Software Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center. Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the latest version. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ ● • Camera Control Pro 2 (available for purchase): Control the camera remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk.
• Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the computer and download pictures via Wi-Fi. ● Smartphone (Tablet) Apps Smartphone apps can be downloaded from the Apple App Store® or on Google Play™. Visit the Nikon website for the latest information. SnapBridge: Download photos and movies from the camera to your smart device via a wireless connection.
Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery. Before removing the battery, confirm that the camera is off.
❚❚ Camera Body Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry the camera thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause product malfunction. Damage due to the presence of foreign matter inside the camera is not covered under warranty.
The Low-Pass Filter Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the low-pass filter and affect your photographs. The “clean image sensor” option vibrates the filter to remove dust. The filter can be cleaned at any time from the menus, or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off. ❚❚ Using the Menus • For maximum effect, hold the camera in normal orientation (base down).
❚❚ Cleaning the Image Sensor at Startup and/or Shutdown Option Description The image sensor is automatically cleaned 5 [Clean at startup] each time the camera is turned on. The image sensor is automatically cleaned [Clean at during shutdown each time the camera is 6 shutdown] turned off. [Clean at startup & The image sensor is cleaned automatically at 7 shutdown] startup and at shutdown. [Cleaning off] Automatic image sensor cleaning off. 1 Select [Clean at startup/ shutdown] for [Clean image sensor].
D Image Sensor Cleaning • Using camera controls interrupts any image sensor cleaning begun in response to the operation of the power switch. • Image sensor cleaning may not fully remove all foreign matter from the filter. Clean the filter manually (0 1078) or consult a Nikon-authorized service representative. • If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry.
❚❚ Manual Cleaning If foreign matter cannot be removed from the low-pass filter using the “clean image sensor” option (0 1075), the filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however, that because the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged, we recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative. • To prevent loss of power during the operation, use a fullycharged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and power connector.
3 Press J. • The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open. The display in the top control panel will flash. The displays in the viewfinder and rear control panel will turn off. • To restore normal operation without inspecting the low-pass filter, turn the camera off. • 4 Holding the camera so that light can enter the camera, examine the filter for dust or lint. If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 6.
5 Remove any dust and lint from the low-pass filter with a blower. • Do not use a blower-brush. The bristles could damage the filter. • Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter. 6 Turn the camera off and replace the lens. The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.
D Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain caused by the shutter closing inadvertently during the operation, observe the following precautions: • Do not turn the camera off while the mirror is raised. • Do not remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). • Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally.
Replacing the Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery. CR1616 batteries have a life of about two years. If the B icon is displayed in the top control panel while the standby timer is on, the battery is running low and needs to be replaced. When the battery is exhausted, the B icon will flash while the standby timer is on, indicating that although photographs can still be taken, they will not be stamped with the correct time and date.
4 Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so that the positive side (the side marked with “+” and the battery name) is visible. 5 Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards the back of the main battery chamber. Stop when the cover clicks into place. 6 Reinsert the main battery. 7 Set the camera clock. The B icon will flash in the top control panel until the clock is set. D Inserting the Clock Battery Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation.
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions Camera Care Do Not Drop Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration. ● Keep Dry Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water inside the camera can not only be expensive to repair but can in fact cause irreparable damage.
● Do Not Leave the Lens Pointed at the Sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for extended periods. Intense light may damage the image sensor or cause fading or “burn in”. Photographs taken with the camera may exhibit a white blur effect. ● Lasers and Other Bright Light Sources Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens, as this could damage the camera’s image sensor.
The Lens Contacts Keep the lens contacts clean. ● Do Not Touch the Shutter Curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged: under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain. • The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored; this does not indicate a malfunction. It also has no effect on pictures.
Turn the Product Off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source Removing or disconnecting the power source while the camera is on could damage the product. Particular care should be taken not to remove or disconnect the power source while images are being recorded or deleted. ● Notes on the Monitor The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective.
Battery Care Precautions for Use If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the product to corrode. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries: - Turn the product off before replacing the battery. - Batteries may be hot after extended use. - Keep the battery terminals clean. - Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. - Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to flame or excessive heat.
• • • • • Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F). Failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
Have Fully-Charged Spare Batteries Ready on Cold Days Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold weather, charge one battery before use and keep another in a warm place, ready to be exchanged as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge. ● ● Battery Level • Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.
Using the Charger • Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger. • Unplug the charger when it is not in use. • Use the MH-26a with compatible batteries only. • Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or that produce unusual sounds when used.
Exposure Program The following graph shows the exposure program for mode P (ISO 100, maximum lens aperture f/1.4): 15 f/1 14 12 13 11 9 10 8 7 5 6 3 4 2 0 1 -1 -3 -2 [ -4 4 ] EV 17 16 f/1.4 17 1 /3 f/2 2 3 19 1 f/4 f/5.6 20 5 18 f/2.
Specifications Nikon D6 Digital Camera Type Type Single-lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts) Effective Nikon FX format angle of view Effective pixels Effective 20.8 million pixels Image sensor Type Total pixels Dustreduction system 1094 Specifications 35.9 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor 21.
Storage • • • • Image size (pixels) • • • • • [FX (36 × 24)] selected for image area: - 5568 × 3712 (Large: 20.7 M) - 4176 × 2784 (Medium: 11.6 M) - 2784 × 1856 (Small: 5.2 M) [1.2 × (30 × 20)] selected for image area: - 4640 × 3088 (Large: 14.3 M) - 3472 × 2312 (Medium: 8.0 M) - 2320 × 1544 (Small: 3.6 M) [DX (24 × 16)] selected for image area: - 3648 × 2432 (Large: 8.9 M) - 2736 × 1824 (Medium: 5.0 M) - 1824 × 1216 (Small: 2.2 M) [5:4 (30 × 24)] selected for image area: - 4640 × 3712 (Large: 17.
Storage • File format (image quality) Picture Control System Media Double card slots File system 1096 Specifications NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit (lossless compressed, compressed, or uncompressed); large, medium, and small available (medium and small images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits using lossless compression) • JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1:4), normal (approx. 1:8), or basic (approx.
Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder FX: Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical • 1.2×: Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical • DX: Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical Frame • 5:4: Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical coverage • 1:1: Approx. 95% horizontal and 100% vertical • 16:9: Approx. 100% horizontal and 96% vertical Magnification Approx. 0.72× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, −1.0 m−1) 17 mm (−1.
Lens • • • Compatible lenses • • • Types G, E, and D (some restrictions apply to PC lenses) Other AF NIKKOR lenses (excluding IX NIKKOR lenses and lenses for the F3AF) AI-P NIKKOR lenses DX lenses (using [DX (24 × 16)] image area) Non-CPU AI lenses (modes A and M only) During viewfinder photography, the electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Release S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH Release mode (continuous high speed), Q (quiet shutter-release), E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up) Approximate • CL: 1–10 fps • CH: 10–14 fps frame advance rate • Q: 1–5 fps 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.
Exposure • • Metering mode • • • Range * • • * Exposure meter coupling 1100 Specifications Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle in center of frame; diameter of circle can be changed to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on average of entire frame (non-CPU and AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3
Exposure Mode Exposure compensation Exposure lock ISO sensitivity (Recommended Exposure Index) Active D-Lighting P (programmed auto with flexible program); S (shutterpriority auto); A (aperture-priority auto); M (manual) –5 – +5 EV; −3 – +3 EV when filming movies (choose from step sizes of 1/3, 1/2, and 1 EV) Luminosity locked at detected value ISO 100–102400 (choose from step sizes of 1/3, 1/2, and 1 EV); can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent) below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.
Autofocus Detection range −4.
Flash Flash control Flash mode Flash compensation Flash-ready indicator Accessory shoe TTL flash control using RGB sensor with approximately 180K (180,000) pixels: i-TTL flash control; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted metering, standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR with spot metering Front-curtain sync, red-eye reduction, slow sync, redeye reduction with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off –3 – +1 EV (choose from step sizes of 1/3, 1
White balance Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy, shade, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), flash, choose color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), preset White balance manual (up to 6 values can be stored, spot white balance measurement available during live view), all with fine-tuning Bracketing Bracketing Exposure and/or flash, white balance, and ADL Live view Mode C (photo live view), 1 (movie live view) Movie Metering system Metering mode 1104 Specifications TTL metering usi
Movie • • Frame size (pixels) and frame rate File format Video compression Audio recording format Audio recording device 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD): 30p (progressive), 25p, 24p 1920 × 1080: 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p • 1280 × 720: 60p, 50p • 1920 × 1080 crop: 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p * Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively * Quality selection available at all sizes except 3840 × 2160, when quality is fixed at c (high) MOV, MP4 H.
Movie Active D-Lighting Can be selected from Extra high, High, Normal, Low, and Off Time-lapse movie recording, electronic vibration Other options reduction, time codes Monitor Monitor 8-cm/3.2-in., approx.
Interface Type C USB connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection to built-in USB port is recommended HDMI output Type C HDMI connector Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter; plug-in power Audio input supported) Audio output Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5 mm diameter) Ten-pin Built-in (can be used with MC-30A/MC-36A remote remote cords and other optional accessories) terminal RJ-45 connector • Standards: IEEE 802.3ab (1000BASE-T)/IEEE 802.3u (100BASE-TX)/IEEE 802.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth • Wi-Fi 1108 Specifications Standards: - IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, and Oceania) - IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (Europe, U.S.A., Canada, Mexico) - IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the Americas) • Operating frequency: - 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and Oceania) - 2412–2462 MHz (channel 11) and 5180–5825 MHz (U.S.A.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth • Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification Version 4.2 • Operating frequency: - Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz Bluetooth - Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz • Maximum output power (EIRP): - Bluetooth: 1.3 dBm - Bluetooth Low Energy: −0.2 dBm Approximately 10 m (32 ft) * Range (line of * Without interference. Range may vary with signal sight) strength and presence or absence of obstacles.
Location data Maximum log recording 6, 12, or 24 hours time Log deletion Supported Power source Battery AC adapter One EN-EL18c rechargeable Li-ion battery * * EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that fewer pictures can be taken on a single charge with an EN-EL18 than with an EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a. EH-6c AC adapter; requires EP-6 power connector (available separately) Tripod socket Tripod socket 0.635 cm (1/4 in., ISO 1222) Dimensions/weight Dimensions Approx.
Operating environment Temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F) Humidity 85% or less (no condensation) • Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines. • All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery. • The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and illustrations in the manuals are for expository purposes only.
❚❚ MH-26a Battery Charger Rated input Rated output Supported batteries Charging time per battery Operating temperature Dimensions (W× H × D) Length of power cable Weight AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz DC 12.6 V/1.2 A Nikon EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion batteries Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes * Time required to charge battery at an ambient temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F) Approx. 160 × 85 × 50.5 mm (6.3 × 3.3 × 2 in.) Approx. 1.8 m/6 ft (U.
❚❚ EN-EL18c Rechargeable Li-ion Battery Type Rated capacity Operating temperature Dimensions (W× H × D) Weight Rechargeable lithium-ion battery 10.8 V/2500 mAh 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F) Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.2 × 1.1 × 3.2 in.) Approx. 160 g (5.
Calibrating Batteries The MH-26a battery charger can detect whether batteries require calibration and calibrate them as necessary to ensure the accuracy of the battery level display. Calibration status and progress are shown by lamps on the battery charger: 1 2 3 4 Chamber lamps (green) Charge lamps (green) Calibration lamps (yellow) Calibration buttons If the calibration lamp for the current battery chamber flashes when a battery is inserted, the battery needs to be calibrated.
2h 4h 6h Calibration (CAL ON) lamp (yellow): L/R Charge lamps (green) Approximate time needed to recalibrate battery Under 2 Over 6 2–4 hours 4–6 hours hours hours I (off) K (on) K (on) K (on) I (off) I (off) K (on) K (on) I (off) I (off) I (off) K (on) K (on) K (on) K (on) K (on) Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement of battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when the calibration lamp flashes. Once begun, calibration can be interrupted as desired.
D Warning Indicators • If the “L” and “R” chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when no battery is inserted… …there is a problem with the charger. Unplug the charger and consult a Nikon-authorized service representative. • If the “L” and “R” chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a battery is inserted… …a problem has occurred with the battery or charger during charging.
D Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
D Supported Standards • DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera. • Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard introduced with the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital cameras, making it easier to produce high-quality prints.
Approved Memory Cards • The camera can be used with CFexpress (Type B) and XQD memory cards. • Cards with write speeds of 45 MB/s (300×) or better are recommended for movie recording and playback. Slower speeds may result in recording being interrupted. Playback may also be interrupted or jerky when movies are viewed on the camera. • Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and limitations on use.
Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 128 GB 1 card at different image area, image quality, and image size settings. Actual capacity varies with shooting conditions and the type of card. [FX (36 × 24)] Selected for Image Area This category also includes images taken with non-DX lenses when [On] is selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop].
Image quality NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 14-bit Image size File size Number of Buffer exposures capacity 2, 3 remaining 2 Large Approx. 33.1 MB 3500 frames 133 frames Large Approx. 38.0 MB 3000 frames 105 frames Large JPEG fine 4 Medium Small Large JPEG normal 4 Medium Small Large JPEG basic 4 Medium Small Approx. 10.8 MB Approx. 6.9 MB Approx. 3.8 MB Approx. 5.7 MB Approx. 3.5 MB Approx. 2.0 MB Approx. 2.6 MB Approx. 1.8 MB Approx. 1.
[DX (24 × 16)] Selected for Image Area This category also includes images taken with DX lenses when [On] is selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop]. Image quality Image size Large NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 12-bit Medium Small NEF (RAW), Lossless compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Compressed, 14-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 12-bit NEF (RAW), Uncompressed, 14-bit 1122 Memory Card Capacity Large Large Large File size Approx. 9.8 MB Approx. 7.2 MB Approx. 5.6 MB Approx.
Image quality Image size Large JPEG fine 4 Medium Small Large JPEG normal 4 Medium Small Large JPEG basic 4 Medium Small File size Approx. 5.6 MB Approx. 3.7 MB Approx. 2.3 MB Approx. 2.9 MB Approx. 2.0 MB Approx. 1.3 MB Approx. 1.6 MB Approx. 1.1 MB Approx. 0.
1 Figures are for a Sony CEB-G128 128 GB CFexpress memory card (as of December 2019). 2 Number of pictures that can be saved to memory card or stored in memory buffer varies with scene recorded. 3 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Battery Endurance The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-charged EN-EL18c (2500 mAh) rechargeable Li-ion battery 1 is given below. Actual endurance varies with such factors as the condition of the battery, the interval between shots, and the options selected in the camera menus.
• • • • • Using camera Ethernet, Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), and Bluetooth features Using the built-in GNSS receiver Using the camera with optional accessories connected Using VR (vibration reduction) with VR lenses Repeatedly zooming in and out with AF-P lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18c batteries: • Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance. • Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left unused.
1 EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a/EN-EL18 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that the EN-EL18 can take fewer pictures on a single charge than the EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a. 2 Lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s. Live view not used. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24– 70mm f/2.8E ED VR lens.
Location Data (GPS/GLONASS) ● Location Data and Track Logs • If [On] is selected for [Location data (built-in)] > [Record location data] in the setup menu or log tracking is in progress, the camera will continue to acquire log and/or location even while off. • Personal information may be inferred from the location data stored in track logs or embedded in photos and movies.
Trademarks and Licenses • • • • • • • CFexpress is a trademark of the CompactFlash Association in the United States and other countries. NVM Express is a trademark of NVM Express Inc. in the United States and other countries. XQD is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch®, Mac, and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC. • The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Nikon is under license. • Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
D FreeType License (FreeType2) Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project (https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. D MIT License (HarfBuzz) Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project (https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved. D Unicode® Character Database License（Unicode® Character Database） The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database License open-source software.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
Index Symbols P (Programmed auto) ........... 108, 184 S (Shutter-priority auto) ..... 108, 185 A (Aperture-priority auto) . 108, 186 M (Manual) ....................................... 108, 188 S (Single frame) .......................... 109, 203 CL (Continuous low speed)........ 109, 203 CH (Continuous high speed) .... 109, 204 Q (Quiet shutter release) ... 110, 204 E (Self-timer) ................... 110, 204, 209 MUP (Mirror up) .............
AF-C ........................................................... 99, 149 AF-C priority selection ..................... 804 AF-F ....................................................... 100, 151 AF-mode button .............. 98, 152, 163 AF-ON button .............................. 107, 173 AF-S .................................. 99, 100, 149, 151 AF-S priority selection ...................... 805 After burst, show ................................... 737 After delete ...........................................
Color temperature................... 226, 231 Compatible F mount lenses .... 1037 Conformity marking .......................... 949 Connect to PC (built-in Wi-Fi)... 932 Connect to smart device ..470, 476, 929 Continuous AF................................ 99, 149 Continuous high speed.....109, 204, 824 Continuous low speed .......109, 203, 824 Continuous shooting speed ...... 824 Contrast ......................................................... 128 Copy image(s) ..........................................
File number sequence ..................... 830 Fill flash .............................................. 131, 648 Filter effects ................................................ 128 Filtered playback ................................... 427 Filtered playback criteria ............... 735 Fine-tune optimal exposure ...... 821 Firmware version .................................. 957 Flash (White balance) .......... 123, 223 Flash bracketing (Auto bracketing set) ..................................................
I Image area....................................... 136, 292 Image comment .................................... 911 Image Dust Off ref photo............. 906, 1010 Image overlay .......................................... 980 Image quality................................ 118, 142 Image review ................................ 394, 735 Image size ........................................ 120, 145 Image transfer ............................. 523, 546 Incandescent (White balance) 122, 222 Information display ....
Modeling flash ............................ 134, 840 Monitor brightness ............................. 889 Monitor color balance...................... 890 Monitor off delay .................................. 823 Monochrome ............................................ 979 Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ......................................... 125, 272 Movie file type ......................................... 785 Movie quality ............................... 294, 785 Movie shooting menu.....................
R Rating ............................................................... 423 RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role played by card in Slot 2) ........... 308 Rear control panel ............................... 833 Rear-curtain sync ...................... 132, 650 RECENT SETTINGS .................... 990, 997 Rechargeable Li-ion battery ..........28 Red-eye correction.............................. 974 Red-eye reduction ................... 131, 648 Release button to use dial ........... 872 Release mode ..............
Time zone and date............................... 43 Timecode ...................................................... 795 Time-lapse movie ................................. 348 Toning.............................................................. 128 Touch controls......................................... 924 Touch screen .................................... 18, 395 Trim .................................................................... 967 Trim movie ..................................................
Index 1141
Added Functions Updating Camera Firmware To view the camera firmware version or update the camera firmware, select [Firmware version] in the setup menu. The latest firmware for the D6 is available for download from the Nikon Download Center. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.
Features Available with “C” Firmware Version 1.30 The new features available with camera “C” firmware version 1.30 are described below. Focus Point Selection Speed (C 1.20 and Later) A [Focus point selection speed] option has been added to Custom Setting a17 [Focus point options]. The speed at which the focus points for viewfinder photography can be cycled by holding the sub-selector or 1, 3, 4, or 2 on the multi selector can be chosen from [Normal], [High], and [Extra high].
Exposure Maintenance (C 1.30 and Later) A new option, [Keep exp. when f/ changes], has been added to the Custom Settings menu at position b8. In exposure mode M, actions such as changing to a lens with a different aperture range when [Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu may cause unintended changes to aperture and consequently also to exposure. Selecting an option other than [Exposure maintenance off] for [Keep exp.
Recalling Shooting Functions (C 1.20 and Later) A [Recall shooting functions (hold)] item has been added to Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls]. Assigning this role to a control lets you recall previouslysaved values for such settings as exposure mode and metering by pressing the control once during viewfinder photography. The previous values can be restored by pressing the control a second time.
New Sub-Selector Center Option (C 1.20 and Later) A new option, [Prefer sub-selector center], has been added to the Custom Settings menu at position f13. Although at default settings the sub-selector cannot be used to position the focus point while the center is pressed, selecting [Off] for [Prefer sub-selector center] lets you hold the center and still position the focus point by pressing the subselector up, down, left, or right.
Auto AF Fine-Tuning (C 1.11 and Later) The prompt displayed for zoom lenses in Step 4 of “Auto AF Fine-Tuning” (0 900) has changed. Pressing the X button will now return you directly to a dialog where you can choose the remaining zoom position ([WIDE] or [TELE]). Was After completing AF fine-tuning for either the maximum angle or maximum zoom, you will need to repeat the process for the remaining item. Press the X button, select [Overwrite value for existing lens], and repeat Steps 2 to 4.
Band Selection (C 1.10 and Later) Users can now choose the band (2.4 GHz or 5 GHz) for the selected SSID when connecting to a wireless network via a WT-6 wireless transmitter attached to the D6. To connect to networks operating on selected bands: 1 In the setup menu, go to [Wired LAN/WT] > [Options] > [Router frequency band] and choose a router frequency band. • Select [2.4 GHz] or [5 GHz] to connect only to networks operating on the chosen band. • Select [2.
4 Choose a connection type and name the profile. 5 When prompted to choose a connection method, select [Search for wireless network]. • The camera will search for networks active in the vicinity and list their SSIDs. • Only networks operating on the band or bands chosen for [Router frequency band] will be listed. The band is listed next to the network SSID. • If you select [2.
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
